AirVision Transition Training Quick Reference Manual Version 3.1

Add to my manuals
407 Pages

advertisement

AirVision Transition Training Quick Reference Manual Version 3.1 | Manualzz

AirVision Transition Training

Quick Reference Manual

Version 3.1 build 9

1

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Installation …

1.1 New Installation

1.2 Upgrade Installation

Chapter 2 EDAS Ambient Conversion …

Page

Chapter 3 General Information … … …

3.1 Requirements for An AirVision PC …

3.2 Requirements for Running AirVision

3.3 Filtering Buttons in Editors and Reports …

3.4 Editing and Saving … …

3.5 Macro Buttons in Reports …

3.6 Hidden Features …

3.7 Help and Support …

Chapter 4 Configuration … … …

4.1 Parameter Template Editor …

4.2 Site / Parameter … …

4.3 Unit Editor …

4.4 Math Editors …

4.5 GSI & Modbus Drivers

4.6 Data Source Details …

4.7 AQI Program Editor … …

4.8 Violation of Standards Editor

4.9 Wind Rose Levels Editor …

4.10 AIRNow FTP Setup … … …

4.11 Frequency Distribution Editor …

4.12 Email Alarm Trigger Editor … …

4.13 E-Mail Notification Subscriptions …

4.14 Server Configuration

4.15 Modem Types …

4.16 Task Scheduler …

4.17 Report Logo Editor …

Chapter 5 Communication …

5.1 Linking to Logger …

5.2 Logger Download …

5.3 Manual Poll …

5.4 Task Status …

Chapter 6 Data Editors … … …

6.1 Query Usage for All Data Editors

6.2 Average Data Editor …

6.3 Batch Reading Updater

6.4 Purging Data … …

…5

…6

…15

…19

…31

…31

…35

…42

…43

…48

…52

…84

…89

…91

…93

…95

…97

…99

…101

…114

…116

…131

…22

...22

…22

…23

…25

…27

…29

…29

…132

…132

…134

…137

…139

…142

…142

…144

…158

…162

2

6.5 Sample Data Editor …

6.6 Flags Editor … …

6.7 Calibration Data Editor …

6.8 Calibration Adjust Tool …

6.9 Cal Expected Values …

6.10 Forecast Editor … …

Chapter 7 Logs … …

7.1 Log Viewer …

7.2 Internal Reports …

7.3 Purge Journal Messages …

7.4 Audit Table Enable Tool …

7.5 LogBook Entry Editor

7.6 LogBook Report …

Chapter 8 Reports … … …

8.1 Query Usage for All Reports

8.2 Daily Summary Report …

8.3 Data With Flags Report

8.4 Daily Parameter Report

8.5 Monthly Report … … …

8.6 8 Hour Rolling Average Report …

8.7 24 Hour Average Summary Report …

8.8 Logger Reports … … …

8.9 Calibration Reports …

8.10 AIRNow Report …

8.11 AQI Reports … …

8.12 AQS Report … …

8.13 AIRNow CSV Text Report (AQCSV) …

8.14 Violation of Standards … …

8.15 Met Reports … … …

8.16 Statistical Reports … …

8.17 Sample Data Reports …

8.18 Annotations Report

8.19 Audit Trail Report …

8.20 Configuration Reports …

8.21 Cumulative Report …

8.22 Basic Data Export … …

…166

…175

…177

…179

…183

…184

…185

…185

…187

…192

…194

…195

…198

…199

…199

…200

…203

…204

…205

…208

…209

…210

8.23 Average Data Graph Report

8.24 Site Health Report … …

Chapter 9 Additional Modules … …

9.1 Favorites Editor

9.2 Server Restart

…269

…270

…272

…272

...275

9.3 SQL Execution Tool ...

9.4 AQS Import Tools …

…276

…278

9.5 Database Export … … … … … …279

9.6 Creating the CLAIRE Files to Update the CLAIRE System …280

…235

…248

…252

…253

…254

…267

…268

…214

…220

…221

…226

…229

…230

…231

3

Chapter 10 Security … ... …

Chapter 11 Quick Reference …

Chapter 12 Troubleshooting …

Chapter 13 Optional Modules …

13.1 Math Editors …

13.2 Calibration Adjust Tool …

13.3 Data Average Tag Rollup Editor …

13.4 Sync … … …

13.5 Status Displays …

13.6 File Import Configuration …

13.7 File Import Tool … …

13.8 Instrument Polling Setup …

13.9 PARS Module …

13.10 PARS Reports …

13.11 Monitor Assessment

13.12 Monitor Assessment Reports

13.13 Asset Tracking Tool

13.14 Asset Reports …

13.15 ADVP Editor …

13.16 Work Item Editor …

13.17 Work Items

Chapter 14 SQL Server …

14.1 Installing SQL Server 2008 …

14.2 Backing up the Database in SQL 2008 …

14.3 Restoring the Database in SQL 2008 … …

…395

…395

…402

…405

…285

…290

…296

…352

…368

…379

…381

…383

…392

…394

…302

…302

…307

…311

…315

…324

…329

…332

…333

…346

…350

4

Chapter 1: Installation Instructions

AirVision is required to be installed on Windows 7 or 8, Server 2008R2 or 2012 with a recommended

8GB of RAM, under the administrative login of the system, with 500GB hard drive minimum with Intel 5 processor, but Intel 7 is recommended.

First, make sure .NET version 3.5sp1 with service packs and .NET version 4.0 are installed for AirVision to be able to function. Second make sure 2008R2 of SQL Server Standard, Workgroup, Enterprise, or SQL

Express is installed along with any available service packs. Where SQL Express with a limit of 10GB will work for a very small amount of configuration and data, we strongly suggest installing SQL Server

Standard or SQL Server Workgroup to allow for a large capacity of configuration and/or data is being stored. If the server and the client are going to be installed on separate pc’s, be sure to install SQL

Server and create the database on the actual server pc.

NOTE: SQL 2012 or 2014 can be used, but the default security settings can alter the installation steps.

By default, when the database is created, SYSTEM does not have privileges to a database, and they have to explicitly be added in SQL. To do this open the SQL Management Studio and click Connect.

Expand Security then Logins. Double click on NT AUTHORITY\SYSTEM to open the Login Properties screen. Click User Mapping; in the Users mapped to this login: section at the top, put a check in the box beside of AVData. In the Database role membership for: AVData section at the bottom, put a check in the box beside of db_owner and public. Click the OK button at the bottom. From SQL’s main menu at the top select File and Save All. Close the SQL Management Studio.

5

1.1 New Installation

Copy the AVTrend_*.*.*.bak file that you downloaded into the SQL Backup folder. Which is usually located in C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Backup.

When installing AirVision for the first time a blank database will need to be created in SQL Server or

SQL Express called AVData. Open SQL Server Management Studio | right click on Databases and select

New Database | under the General page selection, on the right side of the screen in the Database name field type in AVData | select the Options page selection on the left listed under General | click the down arrow in the Collation field and select SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS | click the down arrow in the

Recovery model field and select Simple |Click OK at the bottom | expand Databases | click once to highlight the AVData database, leaving the SQL Management Studio open.

The database structure will need to be created first before it can be used by the software. Expand

Databases on the left and right click on the AVData database and select Tasks | Restore |Database. This will open a screen titled Restore Database – AVData. Under the Select a page section on the left side of the screen select General.

Under Destination for restore on the right side of the screen the To database field should be defaulted to AVData. The To a point in time field should be grayed out, but defaulted to Most recent possible.

Both of these fields need to remain using their default settings.

Under the Source for restore section on the right side of the screen the From database field should be grayed out, but defaulted to AVData. This field needs to remain using its default setting. The From device field needs to be selected but it will remain grayed out with a blank field. Click the ellipses button at the right end of the field to open the Specify Backup window.

6

The Backup media field should say File. The Backup location should be blank. Click the Add button to bring up the Locate Backup File window.

Open the location C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Backup where the backup file is stored. Select the AVData.bak file so that it is highlighted and the file name appears in the File name field at the bottom of the window and click the OK button to select the file.

This will put the path to the backup file in the Backup location field on the Specify Backup screen. Click the OK button to return back to the Restore Database – AVData screen.

7

The Select the backup sets to restore field now has two backup entries listed. Under the Restore column check the box beside of AVData full Database Backup.

Under the Select a page section on the left side of the screen select Options. Under Restore options on the right side of the screen, check the first option to Overwrite the existing database. Under Restore the database files as will have the AVData and the AVData_log entries listed. Under Recovery state select the first option to RESTORE WITH RECOVERY. Click the OK button to begin the restoring process. On the bottom left the Progress section will show Executing with the percentage.

Once the restore is finished it will give a message stating “The restore of database “AVData’ completed successfully. Click Ok and the window will close. Close the SQL Server Management Studio.

Once the restore has completed close the SQL Server Management Studio.

8

1.1a Installing AirVision Server on the same PC as SQL

To install AirVision Server on the same PC where SQL is installed, insert the new AirVision CD and browse to the Server folder. Open the folder and double click on the setup.exe file to install the Server part of the software. The setup wizard will open, click Next to get started. Select I Agree to the License

Agreement and click Next to continue. Take the default path and folder for the software to be installed into and click Next. Click Next to confirm the installation and the progress bar will begin on the next screen. The installation will try to detect the database and connect to it through the Server Settings

Editor.

If you are running SQL Standard, Workgroup, or Enterprise replace local with the name of the computer where SQL is installed. For example, if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, then you would replace local with MYSERVER leaving off the domain name, which in this example is agilairecorp.com.

If you are running SQL Express replace local with the name of the computer where SQL is installed along with \SQLEXPRESS . For example, if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, then you would replace local with MYSERVER\SQLEXPRESS leaving off the domain name, which in this example is agilairecorp.com.

Be sure to not make any other changes to the file. Do not add in any other characters or spaces, and do not take out any previously existing characters or spaces, as this will cause the login to fail to connect to the Server. After replacing local with the pc name on both tabs click the Test Connection button and if a successful message box pops up click OK then click the Save button at the bottom right. You will not see anything happen when the Save button is clicked. After saving click the X button in the top right corner to close the screen.

Once the database has connected the Database Update Utility will open behind the Installing Server screen if updates need to be made to the database. Click on the small message box to bring it to the

front and click OK. The default is for the database to be backed up if any changes are applied. The database will first be checked to see if any updates are needed, and if so they will then be applied. In order for this process to run the user of the PC and the PC itself has to have full admin privileges into

SQL in order for the installation to be able to make the needed changes to the database. The installation has to have full privileges to create database tables, delete database tables, read from the database tables, write to the database tables, and delete from the database tables. Each step of the backup process will show in the bottom section of the window. When it give the message Processing finished click the OK button, then click the X in the top right corner of the screen to close the backup utility.

9

The installation will continue until it gets to the Installation Complete screen where it will show that

AirVision Server has been installed successfully. Click OK and close the database update screen with the

X in the top right corner. If the AirVision Client is to also be installed on the same PC, leave the Launch

AirVision Client Setup box checked, then click the Close button and it will automatically start the installation for AirVision Client.

The steps for installing the AirVision Client are basically the same as Server. Once AirVision Client has been successfully installed, the AirVision Server service and the Client can be started by leaving the

Launch AirVision Client box checked, then click the Close bottom and the login screen will open.

10

Click the ellipsis button at the end of the Log in to: field to open the properties screen. To setup the default profile fill in the Service Gateway URL with tcp://the server name:9885/. For example: if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, fill in the URL with tcp://MYSERVER:9885/ leaving off the domain name, which in this example is agilairecorp.com.

Leaving the Service Gateway URL field blank will cause AirVision Client to not connect to AirVision Server and the software will not be able to restart the service, link to, nor poll any of the loggers. These

features are controlled by the Server software and the Client software cannot make changes to any of

these features if it is not connected to the Server software.

Once the properties has been set up click the Test Connection button at the end of the URL field. If the database is connected it will return a Success message. Click Ok to save the settings on the properties screen.

The Username should be filled in with Admin, if the password is blank it is to be filled in with Agilaire.

The Admin user should not be changed from its default settings under Security, as this can cause the user to be permanently locked out of the software.

11

1.1b Installing AirVision Server and SQL on different PC’s

If AirVision Server is to be installed on a PC separate from SQL, the installation may not be able to detect where SQL is installed. If this occurs the Database Server field in the Server Settings Editor for both the Default Connection Settings tab and the Advance Settings tab will need to be set. If AirVision

Server has already been installed on the same PC as SQL, skip this step.

If you are running SQL Standard, Workgroup, or Enterprise replace local with the name of the computer where SQL is installed. For example, if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, then you would replace local with MYSERVER leaving off the domain name, which in this example is agilairecorp.com.

If you are running SQL Express replace local with the name of the computer where SQL is installed along with \SQLEXPRESS . For example, if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, then you would replace local with MYSERVER\SQLEXPRESS leaving off the domain name, which in this example is agilairecorp.com.

Be sure to not make any other changes to the file. Do not add in any other characters or spaces, and do not take out any previously existing characters or spaces, as this will cause the login to fail to connect to the Server. After replacing local with the pc name on both tabs click the Test Connection button and if a successful message box pops up click OK then click the Save button at the bottom right. You will not see anything happen when the Save button is clicked. After saving click the X button in the top right corner to close the screen.

1.1c Installing AirVision Client and AirVision Server on different PC’s

If AirVision Client is to be installed on a different PC from AirVision Server, insert the AirVision CD and browse to the Client folder. Open the folder and double click on the setup.exe file to install the Client part of the software. Once AirVision Client has been successfully installed, the Client can be started by leaving the Launch AirVision Client box checked, then click the Close bottom and the login screen will open. If the Client has already been installed on the same PC as AirVision Server, the installation process is complete.

Click the ellipsis button at the end of the Log in to: field to open the properties screen. To setup a profile click the New Profile button and enter in the name of the computer in the Profile Name field.

Only enter in the computer name of the AirVision Server, but not the domain name. For example, if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, fill in the Profile Name with MYSERVER leaving off the domain name, which in this example is agilairecorp.com. Fill in the Username with Admin. Click the password button and enter in Agilaire in both fields and click OK. Fill in the Service Gateway URL with

12

tcp://the server name:9885/. For example: if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, fill in the URL with tcp://MYSERVER:9885/ leaving off the domain name, which in this example is agilairecorp.com.

Leaving the Service Gateway URL field blank will cause the Client to not connect to the Server and the software will not be able to restart the service, link to any of the loggers, nor poll any of the loggers.

These features are controlled by the Server software and the Client software cannot make changes to

any of these features if it is not connected to the Server software.

Once the properties has been set up click the Test Connection button at the end of the URL field. If the database is connected it will return a Success message. Click Ok to save the settings on the properties screen.

The AirVision Server service must be started before AirVision can be logged into. Once the AirVision

Server service is started the Log in to: field should now be showing the name of the computer where the

Server software is installed. The Username should be filled in with Admin, if the password is blank it is

to be filled in with Agilaire, if it is already filled in with dots then simply click the OK button to log in.

The Admin user should not be changed from its default settings under Security, as this can cause the user to be permanently locked out of the software.

The administrative level is the only level that is preset, and any customer that wants lower level users set up will have to set those users up once the software is installed on site.

13

AirVision cannot run without the services running. If the service was not started from the installation it can be started manually by opening the Control panel | Administrative tools | Services and selecting

AirVision and clicking the start button. Or they can be started automatically by rebooting the PC after the AirVision installation is finished. The service will be set to automatic by the install and should start automatically any time unless it has been manually stopped by the user; then the service will have to be manually started by the user or the PC will need to be rebooted for the service to start automatically.

14

1.2 Upgrade Installation

AirVision is required to be installed on Windows 7 or 8, Server 2008R2 or 2012 with a recommended

8GB of RAM, under the administrative login of the system, with 500GB hard drive minimum with Intel 5 processor, but Intel 7 is recommended.

First, make sure .NET version 3.5 with service packs and .NET version 4.0 are installed for AirVision to be able to function. Second make sure 2008R2 of SQL Server Standard or Enterprise (recommended), or

SQL Express is installed along with any available service packs. Where SQL Express with a limit of 10GB will work for a very small amount of configuration and data, we strongly suggest installing SQL Server

Standard or SQL Server Enterprise to allow for a large capacity of configuration and/or data is being stored. If the server and the client are going to be installed on separate pc’s, be sure to install SQL

Server and create the database on the actual server pc.

NOTE: SQL 2012 or 2014 can be used, but the default security settings can alter the installation steps.

By default, when the database is created, SYSTEM does not have privileges to a database, and they have to explicitly be added in SQL. To do this open the SQL Management Studio and click Connect.

Expand Security then Logins. Double click on NT AUTHORITY\SYSTEM to open the Login Properties screen. Click User Mapping; in the Users mapped to this login: section at the top, put a check in the box beside of AVData. In the Database role membership for: AVData section at the bottom, put a check in the box beside of db_owner and public. Click the OK button at the bottom. From SQL’s main menu at the top select File and Save All. Close the SQL Management Studio.

15

Important: Agilaire strongly recommends running a backup of the database before upgrading the software, either manually or by the pre-database update during the installation. Instructions on backing up the database are referenced in Chapter 14.

1.2a Installing AirVision Server on the same PC as SQL

To install AirVision Server on the same PC where SQL is installed, first close AirVision. Insert the new

AirVision CD and browse to the Server folder. Open the folder and double click on the setup.exe file to install AirVision Server. The setup wizard will open, click Next to get started. Select I Agree to the

License Agreement and click Next to continue. Take the default path and folder for the software to be installed into and click Next. Click Next to confirm the installation and the progress bar will begin on the next screen. The Database Update Utility will open behind the Installing Server screen if updates need to be made to the database. Click on the small message box to bring it to the front and click OK. The default is for the database to be backed up if any changes are applied. The database will first be checked to see if any updates are needed, and if so they will then be applied. In order for this process to run the user of the PC and the PC itself has to have full admin privileges into SQL in order for the installation to be able to make the needed changes to the database. The installation has to have full privileges to create database tables, delete database tables, read from the database tables, write to the database tables, and delete from the database tables. Each step of the backup process will show in the bottom section of the window. When it give the message Processing finished click the OK button, then click the X in the top right corner of the screen to close the backup utility.

This upgrade will take significantly longer to run because of all of the updates that have to be made to the database. To help the performance of this process we recommend changing the memory settings in

SQL. To do this open the SQL Server Management Studio | right click on the PC name/SQL Server instance at the top of the tree above Databases on the left side of the SQL screen | Properties |Memory.

The Maximum server memory field will have a large number that tells SQL to use all available memory.

We recommend changing the setting 50% of the PC's physical memory (e.g., 2000 MB for a 4GB PC) before running this update.

The update will roughly take 6 minutes per GB of database size (e.g., about 1 hour for a 10 GB database), so the AirVision system will be offline for a good amount of time.

A Command Timeout control has been added to the database update screen. It defaults to 120 minutes

(2 hours), but can be adjusted up to 10000 (approx. 1 week). Using the information in the above paragraph to approximate the time it will take for the database to update. If the size of the database indicates that it will take more than two hours, Agilaire suggests starting out with it set to 720 minutes

(12 hours) to avoid the database update from failing and giving a timeout error. To do this click the

Cancel button, change the Command Timeout, then click the Update button. If it takes less than 12 hours for the database to update it will simply give a message when it has finished successfully.

16

The installation will continue until it gets to the Installation Complete screen where it will show that

AirVision Server has been installed successfully. Click OK and close the database update screen with the

X in the top right corner. If the AirVision Client is to also be installed on the same PC, leave the Launch

AirVision Client Setup box checked, then click the Close button and it will automatically start the installation for AirVision Client.

The steps for installing the AirVision Client are basically the same as Server. Once AirVision Client has been successfully installed, the AirVision Server service and the Client can be started by leaving the

Launch AirVision Client box checked, then click the Close bottom and the login screen will open.

17

1.2b If AirVision Client has been installed on a different PC from AirVision

Server

, after AirVision Server has successfully updated the AirVision Client software will automatically update to the same version of the AirVision Server when it connects to the Server software. If for some reason the Client doesn’t automatically update when connecting to the upgraded server, then simply run the installation of the Client software on the Client PC. The Admin user should not be changed

from its default settings under Security, as this can cause the user to be permanently locked out of the software.

18

Chapter 2: EDAS Ambient Conversion

ATTENTION: Please read this entire chapter before proceeding with converting any Ambient data. This document covers the conversion for Ambient systems only.

Note: The conversion of ATX systems has to be done in house by Agilaire.

Important: Agilaire strongly recommends running a backup of the database once the conversion for the configuration is complete in the case that you have to restore without data, this would keep the configuration from being lost and from having to be hand entered again. Then create another backup once the data has been converted. Then run the backup on a frequent basis to keep from losing data in the case of having to restore from the last backup. Running a backup daily would be the first choice, but if this is not possible, running a backup weekly would be the second choice.

Before running the conversion, keep in mind that you should never run a conversion or make drastic changes to the data folder that the Ambient software uses. Copy the contents of the data directory into a backup folder, then the conversion can be ran on the contents of the backup folder. This is a precaution to make sure the original data folder does not get damaged; as we advise that you continue to run the Ambient system in parallel to the new AirVision system for a few months to ensure that everything is operating properly.

If the conversion runs into any problems it will give an error, which will stop the conversion. To minimize the chance of getting errors during the conversion, look at the files in the backup folder and make sure the data files are in sets. If you only have one data file from a set it will need to be removed to keep the conversion from stopping with an error on that file.

The data files should be in sets so there will be two files per each data set that will have the name of the files duplicated, but will have two different extensions. One file will have the extension of .dat and the other file will have the extension of .inx.

Minute files begin with M and the format is the two digit logger ID, the two digit year, and the three digit Julian day. Auxiliary begins with AUX, Hourly begins with HLY, Daily begins with DLY, and

Calibration begins with CAL; and the format for all of these files is the two digit year and the two digit month. Raw files are only for hourly and auxiliary and they begin with RWH and RWA, and the format is the same as the validated files.

The configuration of each channel should be complete even if the channel is disabled. It is imperative that the Base and Average 1 & 2 intervals are filled in as well as the storage times. If the data type in the interval field is not stored by the logger, or isn’t polled by the software, simply put the storage time 000S for zero seconds. If these fields are not filled in before the conversion is ran on the configuration, it will give an error during conversion and cause it to stop running.

AirVision does not communicate with 8800 loggers, so any site that is setup as an 8800 the conversion will skip over and those settings will not be imported into AirVision. To have data from an 8800 site added to AirVision it must first be changed over to an 8816 in the Ambient software. This means that all of the settings have to be removed from the 8800 setup starting with the least significant settings such as alarm and digital settings, then the calibrations, then the parameters, and then the sites last. You will then have to put all of those settings back in under the 8816 set up keeping all of the settings identical

19

to as they were before, such as the names and ID’s so that the data will match correctly to the channels and sites that is belongs too.

However, keep in mind that if the 8800 logger is still in use at the site AirVision will not collect data from that site until the 8800 logger is physically replaced with an 8832.

The conversion utility is now built into AirVision. To run the conversion, single click EDAS Ambient

Conversion from the Utilities menu. The EDAS Ambient Conversion tab will open on the right side of the screen.

NOTE: It is best for the configuration to be converted first before converting the data. Then start with one data type, such as hourly data. The smaller the increments the faster the conversion will run, so you may want to start with a month or quarter to see how quickly it is able to convert, and if the amount of data is small you could advance the time frame of data. Keep in mind the more the sites and parameters the larger the data, and converting a year may take an extended amount of time to complete.

If the units for a parameter in the Ambient software does not match any of the units in the units list in

AirVision, the units will not be converted and the units field in AirVision will be filled in with none. The user will then need to manually select the units from the drop down list in the Site/Parameter screen after the conversion is finished.

If data still exists in the Ambient database that is no longer linked to a site and parameter, it will not have channel to link up with once converted into the SQL database, so SQL will create a generic channel for the data to be linked to. If this occurs and you do not want the generic channels and data showing in

AirVision, Agilaire can provide you with a script that can be edited to remove those channels and the data.

Edas Data Folder section - Click the Browse button and select the path to where the Ambient data backup folder is located. The Load Config button simply loads the config into the grid below the query but does not convert the config.

Data Types section – Check the box beside of Configuration and a data type that you want to convert to the AirVision Database. The raw data options for hourly and auxiliary are only available to be converted when the validated data for the hourly and auxiliary are converted. Converting one data type at a time in small increments is best.

Date Range to Convert Data section – Enter in the Start Date and End Data of the range of the data that is to be converted. Keep in mind the larger the date range the longer it will take for the conversion to complete. If you choose to all of the data at once you will probably have to leave it to convert over multiple hours to possibly multiple days. You can also convert in even smaller section than mentioned to make it easier to correct any errors it may in counter.

Options section

Use Site long name if they exist? – Click to check the box if you want the existing long site name to be used in the new database.

Prepend Logger ID to Site name? – Click to check the box if you want the logger ID to appear at the beginning of the site name in the new database.

20

Prepend Channel number to Parameter name? – Click to check the box if you want the channel number to appear at the beginning of the parameter name in the new database.

Include RAW data – Click this box if you want the raw data to be converted along with the validated data for the hourly and/or auxiliary data.

When ready to run the conversion click the Start Import button.

When the conversion has completed without errors it will bring up an Import complete message box.

Note: There are some settings that the conversion utility will not be able to convert from Ambient over to AirVision, because the setup in AirVision differs so much from Ambient that some of the settings cannot be translated.

21

Chapter 3: General Information

3.1 Requirements for An AirVision PC

The platform can be Windows 7 or 8, Server 2008R2 or 2012.

8GB of RAM minimum is recommended for AirVision Server, and 2GB for AirVision Client.

500GB hard drive minimum with Intel 5 processor, but Intel 7 is recommended.

.NET Framework 3.5sp1 with service packs and 4.0 is needed for AirVision. If AirVision Server and

AirVision Client are on separate machines, the .NET Framework is required on both machines.

A full version of SQL 2008R2, or SQL Express can be used, set up to use Windows Authentication. SQL is required on the server where the database will be located, but is not required on the client pc if the client is separate from the server. Agilaire recommends the Standard, Work Group or Enterprise version of SQL be used as SQL Express has a 10GB limit for the database, which includes the configuration and the data.

On board serial ports if using a modem for polling.

3.2 Requirements for Running AirVision

The screen resolution has to be set at 1280 x 1024 or greater in order to see all of the features on each screen.

All of the menus under the Main Navigation tree on the left side of the screen can be opened with a single click of the mouse on the menu name.

Any tab that opens on the right side of the screen that has its own tree structure; the options in those trees have to be double-clicked to open them further over on the right side or the screen.

In any of the editors when putting in new entries, some of the fields will have a red circle with a white exclamation point. This indicates that the field it is located beside of has to be filled out or it will not allow you to save the other settings in that particular screen.

AirVision has the feel of Office 2007, and the Ribbon at the top is dynamic and will change based upon the screen that you have open.

Each tab that is opened will have an X on the right end of the tab bar that allows you to close only that tab without closing any of the other screens that you may have open.

Most of the tabs can also be closed by right clicking on the tab and selecting close from the popup menu.

22

After making any changes to any of the configuration screen always be sure to save after making each change. This will help to keep SQL from having problems with making the relationships with the pieces of information that has been entered as well and the pieces that have been deleted. Always save any changes you have made before exiting the screen you are in or the changes won’t be kept. Making too many changes before saving can sometimes cause SQL to get confused to the point that it will give an error rather than saving the changes. The more often changes are saved the better for SQL. If you get an error when trying to save changes, it is best to close the screen that is open without saving any of the changes and simply start over by reopening the same screen and saving after each change that is made to insure SQL doesn’t have any problems.

3.3 Filtering Buttons in Editors and Reports

When you hover the mouse over a button it will give the function of the button in a small text box.

Clear field button is the light blue button with the dark blue X located on the right side of certain fields. It is used to clear that field quickly without having to click in the field and backspace, or without having to highlight and then backspace or delete with the delete key.

Clear filter button is the button with the filter with a slash through it located on the left side of all search fields at the top of the columns. It is used to clear or reset the filters for all of the search fields in that section to be blank and show all entries of each column.

Filter each button is the button with a capital A located on the left side of each search field at the top of the columns. It is used to drop down a list that allows you to choose the filter you want to use to sort the column with. Each column also has a down arrow that allows you to pick a specific name from the list to filter the column on down even more.

Column selector button is the button with the two sheets of paper located on the left side of the field name. Selecting this button will open a Field Chooser box that allows you to choose from a list of fields to add or remove columns from the Parameter Selection in the query section of the reports.

23

The minus button is found in the Report Criteria of the reports. Click the button to hid the criteria

selection above the reports and the button will change the minus sign to a plus sign. This allows for

more room for the report to be displayed.

Click the plus sign button and it will bring the criteria selection back up.

The button with a yellow star brings up Date Criteria that lets you select the Current Day, Week,

Month, Quarter, Year, Yesterday, Last Week, Month, Quarter, or put in the number of days back from the current day. This is used to help save time not having to enter in the exact date and time.

Site and Parameter Selection – Select one or more sites and parameters to be shown on the report. To select multiple row; click and drag down the left side of the columns in the blue boxes and each row will highlight as it is selected. You can also click each row while holding down the Control key, or you can click the first row you want to start with then hold down the Shift key and click the last row you want to end with. When right clicking on the selection it will bring up two options of Select All and Clear All

Selections. If multiple fields are selected and the Clear All Selections option is chosen it may not remove the highlight from the fields but it has deselected the previous choices. If you right click and choose

Select All it will highlight all options.

24

Average Interval selection – You can only select one interval per generated report. Select the interval by clicking the blue box on the left side of the interval for the data type you want to run the report for.

Each interval has its description listed to the right of the interval. The default highlight is on the hourly interval, but may not necessarily be selected. To make sure the interval is selected click on the blue box on the left side of the interval so that the interval and description is highlight with dots around the edge of the highlight.

In various areas of the software, specifically above columns, such as the Parameter Selection will be an area that states Drag a column header here to group by that column.

This means that you can resort the columns, or you can drag a column header to this area and it will sort the rest of the columns off of the column header that was chosen.

Quick Launch field – Is located on the Ribbon for each of the Main Navigation menus. To save time in finding a menu when you are unsure where it is located, you can click the down arrow and select the menu from the drop down list. After the menu is showing in the Quick Launch field, click the green circled check mark button to search for the menu, and it will open that menus screen.

3.4 Editing and Saving

All of the menus under Configuration Editors, Data Editors, Utilities, and Reports are listed in alphabetical order, and only require one mouse click to open the editor on the right side of the screen.

If a tab opens on the right side of the screen with a tree menu, it will take a double click to open the menu to the right of the tree menu.

To add buttons to the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top; click the green sun button and it will drop down a list of options to choose from. To add any of the option right click on the button option you want to add and select Add To Quick Access Toolbar. The options that can be added to the toolbar are listed below. This toolbar is similar to the toolbar in Word 2007. There is also an Exit button at the bottom right of the drop down list. Clicking this button will close the entire AirVision program

Save. After setting up any new screens or making changes to any screens that are open, be sure to click the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting the screen.

25

Refresh. When making changes in certain setup screens that affect other parts of the software. If those screens are open when the changes are made those screens do not see those changes without the screen is refreshed. A screen can be refreshed by closing and reopening it again, or by selecting the refresh button on the quick access bar beside of the save button or from the Sun menu drop down.

Screen Capture Form. This button will give you three options to choose from to capture the screen; the clipboard, the printer, and an image file. The image that gets capture is only the screens that are brought up from the menus. It does not capture the Ribbon at the top, nor the Main Navigation menus on the left side.

To Clipboard. Capturing the screen to the clipboard allows you to paste the image into an image editing program such as paint so that you can edit the image.

To Printer. Capturing the screen to the printer will bring up a small Print preview screen that will show what the print out is going to look like. To send the image to the printer click the printer icon macro button on the left of the macro bar at the top. It also gives the options to preview the printout from one to six pages, or to increase or decrease the preview size for viewing. The number of pages to print out be printed can be selected as well.

To Image File. Capturing the screen to a file will bring up a Screenshot File Location screen where you can select the location of where to save the file to and the name of the file. The type of the file will be save as a PNG Image file. Right clicking on the .png file and selecting to open with will give a number of programs that the image can be view in. Double clicking on the .png file will default to being opened with Microsoft Office Picture Manager.

Print. The print button comes into focus when data is brought up in a report so that it can be printed by clicking the print button.

Close. This button will close the tab or sub-tab that is in focus. To close a sub-tab without closing the parent tab, you need to right click on the sub-tab that is in focus and select Close active form from the pop-up menu and it will close only that one sub-tab.

AirVision Profiles. This button brings up the same profiles screen as the ellipses button does on the login screen. This screen is used to setup the client connection to the server and database.

Exit. If this button is selected it does not just close the Quick Access Toolbar selection, it closes the whole AirVision program.

26

If you make edits in any of the editors that carries over to other editors, even though you have saved the edits, if the other editors are open that should be seeing the edits, they won’t refresh until you close and reopen those editors. Once you have done so they will see the edits that were saved in the other editors. I need to reword this to sound better.

3.5 Macro Buttons in Reports

The reports Toolbar is in the Report Output section of the reports. The buttons will remain grayed out until the report has been generated; then only the buttons that apply to that report will become active.

If you hover the mouse over a button, active or inactive, it will pop up a quick reference as to what the button is used for. Each button is explained below.

The button with the paper and floppy disk with a drop down selection is the Export Document button. Selecting the button will bring up an export options box of the preselected format where you can select the settings for the export. It is best to select the drop down arrow first, which lets you pick the format to export the file in. When selecting the format it will bring up an export options box for the settings for the format that you chose. After entering in the setting select the OK button and it will bring up a Save As box where you pick the location of where the save the report, and to either except the default name or change it, before saving the report. These Exporting Options are also available on the

Ribbon minus the MHT and Image File options.

The button with the binoculars is the Search button. Selecting this button will bring up a find box where you type in what you want to search for, and select how you want it to search. The Search option is also available on the Ribbon.

The button with the printer and question mark is the Print button. Selecting this button will bring up a print query box where you select the printer you want to print to as well as which pages and how many to print.

The button with the printer is the Quick Print button. Selecting this button will send the report directly to the default printer and will not give you the print query box to make the selection you want.

The button with the paper and wrench is the Page Setup button. Selecting this button will bring up a page setup box where you can select the letter size and source, if you want it portrait or landscape, and set the margins.

The button with the little box and arrow inside of a larger box is the Scale button. Selecting this button will bring up a scaling box to adjust the size of the page.

The button with the hand is the Hand Tool button. Selecting this button will change the mouse from the arrow to a hand that will allow you to grab a hold of the page and drag it up or down. This is an alternative if your mouse does not have a track wheel or if you don’t want to use the scroll bar on the right side of the report.

27

The button with the magnifying glass and the dot is the Magnifier button. Selecting this button will change the mouse from the arrow to a magnifying glass with a minus sign. Placing the magnifier on the report on clicking is once will take the report from 100% down to 36% and will change the mouse to a magnifying glass with a plus sign on it. Clicking on the report once again will take it from 36% back to

100%. Click the magnifier button again and it will change it from the magnifying glass back to the arrow.

The button with the magnifying glass and minus sign is the Zoom Out button. Each time this button is selected it reduces the report in size by 5%.

The percent down arrow button is the Zoom Options button. Selecting the down arrow allows you to change the size of the report. Zoom Options are also available on the Ribbon.

The button with the magnifying glass and the plus sign is the Zoom In button. Each time this button is selected it increases the report in size by 10% if increasing from 100%. If the report has been reduced below 100% the button will increase the report in size by 5% until it reaches 100%.

The button with the bar and left arrow is the First Page button. If the report is on any page other than the first page, selecting this button will take you to the first page. If the report is already on the first page this button will be grayed out.

The button with the left arrow is the Previous Page button. If the report is on any page other than the first page, selecting this button will take you to the previous page. If the report is already on the first page this button will be grayed out.

The button with the right arrow is the Next Page button. If the report is on any page other than the last page, selecting this button will take you to the next page. If the report is already on the last page this button will be grayed out.

The button with the right arrow and the bar is the Last Page button. If the report is on any page other than the last page, selecting this button will take you to the last page. If the report is already on the last page the button will be grayed out.

The button with the three sheets of paper is the Multiple Pages button. Selecting this button will drop down a selection the will expand down three rows and expand over ten columns. Placing the mouse over each block will show at the bottom of the drop down how many pages by how many pages it can change the layout of the report to. Selecting one of those layouts will change the report to that selection.

The button with sheet of paper and yellow box is the Color background button. Selecting this button will bring up a color box with three tabs; Custom, Web, and System where you can select the color of the background on the report.

The button with paper with lines through it is the Watermark button. Selecting this button will bring up a Watermark box where you select the text or picture that you want across the paper, the direction, color, size, font, and transparency of the text or picture.

28

The button with the envelope and drop down selection is the Send Via Email button. Selecting the button will bring up an export options box of the preselected format where you can select the settings for the export. It is best to select the drop down arrow first, which lets you pick the format to export the file in. When selecting the format it will bring up an export options box for the settings for the format that you chose. After entering in the setting select the OK button and it will bring up a Save As box where you pick the location of where the save the report, and to either except the default name or change it, before saving the report. After selecting saving the report it will bring up your email window for composing an email with the exported format attached to the email.

3.6 Hidden Features

Each screen opens under its own tab in the right pane of the software. Some of those main tabs also have sub-tabs. Those tabs and sub-tabs can be closed in a number of different ways.

The X at the far right will close the main tab that is in focus and all of its sub-tabs that are open, but it can’t close just the sub-tabs. Some of the screens will have a Close Active Form button on the Ribbon at the top, and if the button is colored in it has the ability to close the main tab or sub-tab that is in focus.

Other screens will have main tabs and sub-tabs that actually have the X on the right end of the tab itself, which can be clicked to close the tab. Most of the tabs can also be closed by right clicking on the tab and selecting Close.

Most of the menus have options to add or delete. A few of the menus do not have the delete option, but that does not mean that you can’t delete certain entries. For some of those menus that don’t have the delete option, the alternative is to use the delete key.

The AQI Editor is one of the menus that doesn’t have a delete option. To delete a program no longer needed or wanted by the user, simply highlight the row in the top section be clicking once on the blue box at the left end of the row. Once the row is highlighted press the delete key on the keyboard and it will bring up a message box that states: You have selected 1 row for deletion. Choose Yes to delete the row or No to exit. If Yes button is selected the row will be deleted. In order for the deletion to take affect the change must be saved.

3.7 Help and Support

Help and Support is a new menu option under the Main Navigation menu that has four sub-menu options.

When Agilaire Support is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the Support page on the Agilaire web site.

When AirVision Manual is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the

AirVision manual in pdf form. The pfd can be downloaded.

When Software Release Info is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the

Agilaire web site to the page where the Release Notes are listed for the latest version first, then some of the previous versions on down the page.

When Video Tutorials is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the Agilaire web site to the Video Training Resources page where a video for AVTrend is listed first, and

29

individuals videos for different sections of AirVision are listed next, and videos for the 8872 are listed last.

30

Chapter 4: Configuration Editors

After entering in and saving some setting you may be prompted to restart the AirVision service. You may do so, or if you have other settings that you need to enter or change that you know will also prompt you to restart the service you can opt to wait by clicking No on the prompt. When you are finished with entering, changing, and saving all of the settings then restart the service by clicking Yes on the prompt or by manually restarting the service using the Server Restart menu; this menu is discussed in further detail in Chapter 9.

4.1 Parameter Template Editor

The purpose of the template editor is to setup templates for existing parameters that are going to be used at multiple sites, and will be used during the setup of each parameter in the Site/Parameter screen.

This will help to save time for the user setting up parameters so they don’t have to fill in every field manually, they can simply apply a template and it will automatically fill in the fields. The user can fill in the blank fields in the parameter setup if needed. Some of the fields are blank in the templates, and can be filled in by the user if needed. It is highly recommended that the settings that have been preset for

the parameter templates not be changed, and if changes are needed, it is best to select a different parameter template that the parameter can be associated with. If the proper template does not

exist, then one should be created with the needed settings for that parameter to be associated with.

Some parameters that are imported in a configuration are likely to not have existing templates for those parameters, and if used at a number of sites creating a template would likely to prove helpful in saving time in setting up those parameters.

Important! - A template should be used once for one parameter per site. If a template is used for more than one parameter at the same site, it can cause the reports to not function properly as the reports will not know which parameter the template is supposed to be reporting for. There is a template already created for each type of parameter with the specific EPA Parameter Code selected.

This is especially important when setting up Particulate Matter continuous and non-continuous data, and for AQI reporting. If a parameter template for Particulate Matter does not exist for the codes and settings you are needing, it is best that the settings for the existing template not be changed, and a new template be created with the settings and codes that are needed, using a different name than the templates that are already created in the list.

To setup parameter templates, single click Parameter Template Editor from the Configuration Editors menu. The Parameter Template Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen that has multiple fields. As parameters are added they will appear in the Parameter Name column on the left of the setup screen.

To add a new template, select the New button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields on the right side of the screen, which are described below.

To open an existing template, single click the parameter name in the Parameter Name column to bring up the parameter settings on the right side of the screen.

31

To delete an existing template, single click the parameter name in the Parameter Name column that you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the template is immediately removed from the list.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Parameter Template Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

Parameter – Enter in the name of a monitored pollutant, meteorological parameter, or other measured entity.

Description – Enter in a description of the parameter if one is needed. This is not a required field.

AIRNow Mnemonic – These names are what is going to show on the AIRNow report. If you want the name of the parameter as you have it set in the software to be the way it shows on the report just simply type in the same parameter name. If not, then type in the name that is required to appear on the AIRNow report. Example of a parameter that might have two different spellings one of which you have in the software and one of which is required on the report could be Ozone or O3. This field is required if the parameter template is going to be associated with the parameter that is to be included on the AIRNow report.

Math Equation: (if Calculated) – This designates the parameter to be calculated from the central math pack engine, which makes it like a central only channel. This feature currently has to be turned on with a key from Agilaire, but will be a standard feature in the next release. The instructions for setting up an equation is discussed in Chapter 4 Section 4.4 Math Editors.

Enable AIRNow Reporting – Check this box if you want this parameter to be included as one of the parameter reported on the AIRNow report that will be submitted to EPA.

Parameter Data Type Average (Continuous) is data that is to be collected on an hourly basis, and this setting is the default. Particulate Sample is Non-Continuous data to be manually entered on a nonhourly basis. This option is useful for parameters like TSP (total suspended particulate matter, PM10

(particulate matter), or lead, for which data can be collected at different intervals. Composite Sample is a calculated measurement.

EPA POC – The parameter occurrence code. Enter in a one digit code used to distinguish between different monitors at one site that are measuring the same parameter.

EPA Method – Enter a three digit code indicating the sampling method code.

EPA Units – Enter a three digit code indicating the engineering units for the parameter.

EPA Parameter – Enter a five digit code indicating which parameter is being reported on.

Reported Digits – Number of digits to report between 0 and 6. This number should be greater than or the same as the precision.

32

Precision – Number of digits past the decimal between 0 and 6. This number should be the same as or less than the reported digits.

Truncate Round Rule – Enter a T for truncate and an R for round the end result. The field defaults to truncate.

Reported Units – Enter the engineering units to which the voltage or current inputs will be scaled.

Analyzer Units (if different) – Enter in the units that the analyzer uses if those units are different than the reported units used on the report.

Graph Minimum – Lower scale of the graphs. Changing this setting will change the scaling in the graphs in the Average data Editor.

Graph Maximum – Upper scale of the graphs. Changing this setting will change the scaling in the graphs in the Average data Editor.

Calibration Span – This field is determined by the instrument. Enter the configured calibration span value for the parameter to determine the parameter’s calibration error (at the data logger). For “Error

Calculation,” the value is only used for Standard formula out of the three possible formulas of which are

Standard, Difference, and Linearity.

Formula: (ABS (Actual Value - Expected Value) * 100)) / SPAN where ABS is the absolute value.

Instrument Detection Limit – Minimum concentration of a pollutant that can be measured above instrument background. The data logger is an estimate of concentrations as which one can be fairly certain that the compound is present. Concentrations below this limit may not be detected.

Limit Of Quantization – A minimum criterion or region for quantization that should be clearly above the detection limit. The lowest concentration of a pollutant in a sample that can be determined with acceptable precision and accuracy under the stated operational conditions of the method. Traditionally this is approximated as 10 times the signal-to-noise ratio.

Minimum Detectable Limit – This is the minimum limit, in engineering units, detectable by the instrument. Mainly used for Ozone if you use the Ozone Standard for the Violation of Standards reporting.

Practical Quantization Limit – The lowest concentration of a pollutant that can be reliably measured within specified limits of precision and accuracy during routine operating conditions.

Totalize in Reports – Check this box to get a Total column in the Monthly report and Statistical report. If this box is not checked and the Monthly or Statistical report is ran on the particular parameter it will not show the Total column but instead will show the Average column. If this box is checked the Daily

Summary report will give totals in the Total row at the bottom of the report, if it is not checked the Total row will still show on the report but the cells will be blank.

33

Minimum in Reports – Check this box to get a Minimum column in the Monthly report. If this box is not checked and the Monthly report is ran on the particular parameter it will not show the Minimum column but instead will show the Maximum column.

34

4.2 Site/Parameter

The Site/Parameter editor is used to setup Systems, Sites and Parameters. To setup these features, single click Site/Parameter from the Configuration Editors menu. The Site/Parameter tab will open on the right side of the screen. This tab has a tree menu that expands each System’s Sites and their

Parameters once they have been created. All of the settings created here are for the software’s purpose only when it comes to generating files and reports to be submitted. Each setup is described below.

4.2.1 Systems

A system is defaulted in the tree menu called System, but the name can be changed by double clicking on System to bring its setting up on the right side of the screen. Multiple systems are not usually needed unless for example a state agency was also polling data from some of the counties and wanted to keep the counties configuration separated from each other to make it easier to sort through.

To add a new system, select the Add System button on the Ribbon at the top. A new System tab will open on the right side of the screen that has one section that contains three fields which are described below.

To open an existing system, double-click the system name in the tree menu to bring up the System

Name tab.

To delete an existing system, single click the system name in the tree menu you want to remove. Select the Delete System button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Yes to continue deleting the system or select No to stop the deletion and retain the system. However, keep in mind that a system cannot be deleted if it has existing parameters.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Site/Parameter editor, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

General Tab

System Details section

System Name – Enter in the name of the System that will hold the Sites. You can setup more than one System, and it can hold other Sites as well. This is used in a situation where you may be monitoring Sites from another agency or customer and you want to keep different agency

Sites separated from each other in different Systems.

Country Code – This code for the United States is 840, which should fill in automatically.

Time Zone – Click the down arrow and select a time zone for the polling pc from the drop down list.

35

AQS Agency Code – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the agency’s code and name.

AIRNow Agency Code – This is your unique three digit agency code established by the EPA, and will be used automatically by the information entered in the AIRNow Setup.

4.2.2 Sites

To add a new site, single click the system name in the tree menu and select the Add Site button on the

Ribbon at the top. A new Site tab will open on the right side of the screen that has four sections that contain a number of fields each, which are described below.

To open an existing site, expand System in the menu tree to show the list of sites. Double-click the site name to bring up the Site Name tab.

To delete an existing site, single click the site name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select the Delete Site button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Yes to continue deleting the site or select No to stop the deletion and retain the site.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Site/Parameter editor, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

General section

Name – Name of the site used to identify a data logger’s location or overall purpose.

Abbreviation – Enter an abbreviation name of the site for easier reference if the site name is too long

Description - Enter a description of the site, or possibly its location to help describe or reference the purpose of the site. This field is not required to be filled in.

Time Zone – Select the time zone from the drop down list where the site is located.

Enabled – Click the box to add or remove the check to enable or disable the site.

36

Miscellaneous section

Latitude – Enter a value for the site location (0-90 degrees) as a decimal.

EPA Site – Enter in the four digit code indicating the site of the data collection.

Longitude – Enter a value for the site location (0-180 degrees) as a decimal.

AIRNow Mnemonic – If you use Mnemonic site names for the AIRNow, enter the name in this field. Mnemonic names are used for when you need to report a pollutant by a specific name such as Ozone, but you have ozone setup in the software as O3. The mnemonic name will put all of the O3’s data under Ozone to be submitted to the EPA.

Surrogate Slope – If you are using Ozone Surrogate for the AQS report, enter in the slope for the

Ozone Surrogate.

Surrogate Offset - If you are using Ozone Surrogate for the AQS report, enter in the intercept for the Ozone Surrogate.

File Import Code – This field is customer specific and will not apply to your setup and needs to be left blank.

EPA County or Tribal Code – Enter in the three digit code indicating the county or tribe where the data is collected, which can be selected from the drop down list.

Address section

Enter in the street address, city, county, state, and zip code of where the site is located.

Additional Information section

This section is used for the Site Metatags, but it can also be used as a f

ree editor and note field. Click the row with the asterisks at the bottom to add in a new entry.

Name – The required Metatag name should be called SiteIdentifier.

Value – The value should be the EPA Site code for that particular site.

37

4.2.3 Parameters

To add a new parameter, single click the site name in the tree menu and select the Add Parameter

button on the Ribbon at the top. A new blank tab will open on the right side of the screen that has multiple fields which are described below.

To open an existing parameter, expand System and the site in the menu tree and double-click the parameter name to bring up the Parameter Name tab.

To delete an existing parameter, single click the parameter name that you want to remove. Select the

Delete Parameter button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Yes to continue deleting the parameter or select No to stop the deletion and retain the parameter.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Site/Parameter editor, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Site – The name of the site used to identify a data logger’s location or overall purpose, which is grayed out because it is propagated from the Site configuration screen.

Parameter – Enter the parameter name for a single monitored pollutant, meteorological parameter or other measured entity. This field will be automatically entered if the parameter template field is used.

Parent Parameter – This field is used for parameters that use other settings that forms the parameter.

Its main use is for data QA. A Parent Parameter can be designated to form relationships that can be used for drill-down in the Data Editor. For example, a primary analyzer pollutant such as NOX could be a parent and designated diagnostic parameters such as sample flow or box temperature could be children. Another example would be to assign particulate parameters as parents and metals for XRF (Xray fluorescence) analysis as children.

Enabled – Click the box to add a check mark to enable the parameter to be used by the software.

Filter From Web Site – This field is for filtering a parameter from appearing on AgileWeb historical graphs and reports. Example: logger calculations or temperature that the public would not be interested in.

AgileWeb is an optional feature that can be purchased in addition to AirVision. This field only works with AgileWeb and should remain uncheck if AgileWeb has not been purchased.

Parameter Template – This field uses the parameters created in the Parameter Template Editor. If this field is used it will propagate all of these settings used to create the parameter. If any of the settings that are brought over from the template are different, you can change any of the field simply by clicking in the field and editing the setting, with the exception of the Parameter Data Type. The Parameter Data

Type needs to remain the same as the template that the parameter has been associated with. If the

Parameter Data Type is not correct and needs to be changed, it is best to select a different parameter template that reflects the correct Data Type for the parameter to be associated with. If the proper template does not exist, then one should be created with the needed settings for that parameter to be associated with. A template should be used once for one parameter per site. If a template is used for

38

more than one parameter at the same site, it can cause the reports to not function properly as the reports will not know which parameter the template is supposed to be reporting for. There is a template already created for each type of parameter with the specific EPA Parameter Code selected.

This is especially important when setting up Particulate Matter continuous and non-continuous data. If a parameter template for Particulate Matter does not exist for the codes and settings you are needing, it is best that the settings for the existing template not be changed, and a new template be created with the settings and codes that are needed, using a different name than the templates that are already created in the list.

Parameter Report Order – Parameters are listed in the reports in the same order that they are shown under each site. If parameters need to be shown in a different order on the reports, this field can be set per each parameter setting the order number in which each one is to appear on the reports. This setting will only be seen in the Monthly report and Daily Summary report.

The remaining fields listed below have already been discussed in the Parameter Template section.

Enable AIRNow Reporting

Parameter Data Type

Description

Math Equation: (if Calculated)

EPA POC

EPA Method

EPA Units

EPA Parameter

Reported Digits

Precision

Truncate Round Rule

Reported Units

Analyzer Units

Graph Minimum

Graph Maximum

Calibration Span

Instrument Detection Limit

Limit Of Quantization

Minimum Detectable Limit

Practical Quant Limit

Totalize in Reports

Minimum in Reports

Additional Information section

This section is used for the Parameter Metatags, but it can also be used as a f

ree editor and note field. Click the row with the asterisks at the bottom to add in a new entry.

Name – The required Metatag name should be called ParmIdentifier.

Value – The value should be the EPA Parameter code for that particular parameter.

39

A parameter cannot be deleted if there is data still attached to the parameter. When deleting a parameter, make sure all other tabs are closed before making the deletion. To delete a parameter expand the site and select the parameter, click the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top and it will ask if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. If OK is selected it will then ask if you are sure you want to delete all the data and configuration attached to the parameter. Selecting Yes will permanently delete the parameter and its data. Selecting No will cancel the deletion.

The deletion processes will then start scrolling through data types and time frames as it deletes the data. Once it has finished it will show the status as finished successfully.

40

41

4.3 Unit Editor

To open the Unit Editor, single click Unit Editor from the List Editors menu. The Unit Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

The Unit Editor has been pre-set with the required units for reporting and for polling data straight from the logger and the analyzer, however, if you need to add additional units click the row with the Asterisk symbol (*) at the bottom of the Unit Editor screen, and the row will highlight and put the required field symbol beside of the fields that have to be filled in. Note: It is best to use the tab key to move from one field to the next in this screen. After filling in the needed fields, single click to highlight one of the existing units and the new entry will attach as the bottom row.

Units that the analyzer uses are different than the reported units required on most of the report. The

Analyzer Units is meant for digital communications with the analyzer, which is only needed for direct communication with the analyzer. For the Reported Units to be downloaded to the logger to be used by the logger the Analyzer Units field must remain blank. If the Analyzer Units field is filled in, this will be the units downloaded to the logger instead of the Reported Units, and will cause the values to be calculated incorrectly.

To make changes to an existing unit, single click the blue box to the left side of the unit name to highlight the row, then make the correction to the particular field needing the change.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Unit Editor select, the disk icon on the Quick

Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Unit Name – The name of the unit used in the Site/Parameter screen.

Unit Type – Gives what the unit of measure is.

Slope & Intercept – Used in relation to the acquired units from the analyzer compared to the reported units set in the Site/Parameter screen. If these fields are already filled in with the number that is to remain, such as a 0, do not tab past this field or it will appear that it is blank because nothing was typed in. Be sure to type the number again even if the number is already there, then tab to the next field.

Description – Gives a more details description of the unit name field.

42

4.4 Math Editors

The Math Editors are used in conjunction with the Math Equation field in the Parameter Template and

Site/Parameter screens for a central channel calculation only. This is an add on feature that has to be

enabled with a license key that has to be provided by Agilaire. Math Editors is also discussed in

Chapter 13.1. If the equation is to be used as a global setting it can be set it in the Parameter Template, but if it is going to be used on one parameter only, it can be set on the parameter setup in the

Site/Parameter screen. This setting is to be set after the equation has been configured. To setup math equations or math constants, expand the Math folder from the List Editors menu and single click either

Math Equation Editor or Math Constants Editor. Either of those tabs will open on the right side of the screen. Each setup is described below.

4.4.1 Math Equations Editor

To add a new equation, select the Add Equation button on the Ribbon at the top. It will create a new entry row with an editing box.

To delete an equation, single click the blue square on the left side of the equation name to highlight the row that you want to remove. Select the Delete Equation button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you before simply deleting the current selection.

Equation Name - Type in a name to identify the equation.

Equation Description – Type in a description to help identify the function of the equation.

Math Equation – Type in the formula that is to be used to calculate the value of the selected parameter in the Site/Parameter setup screen. Do not put an equals sign at the end of the formula as it will cause the calculation when ran to give an error and not calculate the value.

If there are any flags that are to be ignored from the propagation can be selected by expanding the plus sign beside of the equation row to open an ignore flags box. To setup a flag select the blue square on the left side of the row with the asterisks, then click the down arrow at the right end of the field and pick the flag from the drop down list.

43

To manually run the calculator select Manual Parameter Calculator from the Utilities menu and it will open the Math Parameter Calculator tab on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection click the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top. To evaluate the calculated data use the Average Data Editor.

4.4.2 Math Constants Editor

To add a new constant, select the Add Constant button on the Ribbon at the top. It will create a new entry row with an editing box.

To delete a constant, single click the blue square on the left side of the constant name to highlight the row that you want to remove. Select the Delete Constant button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you before simply deleting the current selection.

Constant Name - Type in a name to identify the equation.

Constant Value – Type in the value the constant is to be set to.

Constant Description – Type in a description to help identify the function of the constant.

4.4.3 Math Parameter Calculator

To manually run the math equations or math constants, select Math Parameter Calculator from the

Utilities menu. To run all configured equations for a site, select the site tab and enter in the query, then select the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top.

44

To run specific parameter calculations, select the Parameter Calculation tab and enter in the query, then select the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top.

4.4.4 Task Scheduler

To run the math equations automatically, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Calculate Math Parameters Task.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task

Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the

Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.

Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.

Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you want to handle running the task.

45

Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The default is the current date and time that you create the task.

Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the task is to run.

Task Details Section

General Tab

Basic Task Information section

Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list, which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection section at the top unless given a different name by the user.

Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.

Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.

This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled

Task Selection section at the top.

Calculation Options section

Site - Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the site that the calculation is to be performed on. A separate task will have to be configured for each site that a calculation is to be ran for.

Interval - Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the data type that the calculation is to be performed on.

Advanced Tab

Retry Options section

Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.

46

Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.

Status Logging section

Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.

Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom, and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.

Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.

Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.

47

4.5 GSI & Modbus Drivers

To open the GSI and Modbus Drivers, single click GSI/Modbus Drivers from the Configurations Editors menu. The GSI/Modbus Drivers tab will open on the right side of the screen.

The GSI Drivers has been pre-set with the existing GSI and Modbus drivers for various types of instruments. These drivers are needed for GSI and Modbus channels setup in the logger to communicate digitally with the instrument. To add additional drivers, select the New button on the

Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields on the right side of the screen, which are described below. As drivers are added they will appear in the GSI Instrument and Entry columns on the left of the setup screen.

To delete an existing driver, single click the driver name in the GSI Instrument and Entry columns that you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will ask if you are sure you want to delete the selected driver. Select Yes to continue deleting the driver, select No to cancel the deletion.

To make changes to an existing unit, single click the blue square on the left side of the unit name to highlight the row, then make the correction to the particular field needing the change.

After adding in new entries or making any changes in the GSI/Modbus Drivers, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

GSI Driver Entry tab

Details section

Driver Entry Name – Enter in the name that the driver will be referred to as, and that will likely be what the GSI channel is referred to as well. This is a required field.

Associated Instrument – Click the down arrow and select the instrument name from the drop down list that used with this driver. This is a required field.

Data Field Type – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the type of data field that is to be used with the driver. The float type converts ASCII text to a number.

Modbus Register – Has been defaulted to a number associated with the particular modbus instrument. If this field has not been set and is required or needs to be changed, use the radio buttons or type in the number that is needed.

Data Value Format – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the format in which the data that will be parsed into the database.

Autosend section

Send Name – Enter in the name of the GSI channel.

48

AutoSend Repeat Interval – Enter in the interval time the autosend should repeat.

AutoSend String – The string to be sent out of the GSI port. This string can contain time formatting and time offset characters.

Parsing section

Parse Name – Enter in the tag name to identify the GSI delimited parse entry.

Parse Sync String – One or more characters that signal the beginning of the data stream to be parsed.

Fixed section

Number of Chars of Data – Use the radio buttons or type in the number of characters (0-512) between the end of the Start String and the beginning of the channel data field. Zero indicates that the next byte after the Start String is the first character of the channel data.

Data Field Width –Use the radio buttons or type in the number of characters (0-

32) in the channel data field of the incoming stream.

Number of Chars in String – Use the radio buttons or type in the number of characters that is to be received after the last byte of the start string before the string is parsed.

Delimited section

Delimited Chars – Enter in the characters that define the beginning of each new field in the data stream. Up to 32 characters may be entered. If any of the delimiter characters are found, a new field begins with the following character and ends with the character preceding the next delimiter character.

Number of Delimiters to Data –Use the radio buttons or type in the number between the end of the Start (sync) String and the beginning of the Validation

String field, 0 to 99.

Number of Delimiters in String – Use the radio buttons or type in the number of delimiters that must be received after the last byte of the start (sync) string before the string is parsed. The configuration of this field allows for more than one GSI Data Parse Entry to contain the same start (sync) string and for data to be received for multiple channels from a single GSI string.

Advanced section

Primary Driver - Click the down arrow and select the driver entry name from the drop down list that used with this instrument.

49

Input index - Use the radio buttons or type in the number of input indexes.

GSI Driver Digital tab - This tab is only to be used with Modbus. If the logger has not been setup with

Modbus, this tab is to remain with its default settings.

Details section

Driver Entry Name – The driver name is usually associated with the process the instrument is controlling.

Associated Instrument – Click the down arrow and select the name that identifies the instrument.

Coil Number – Using the radio buttons select the coil number this driver is set to.

Input/Output type – Click the circle beside of the correct selection.

GSI Driver Instrument tab – This tab is only to be used with Modbus. If the logger has not been setup with Modbus, this tab is to remain with its default settings.

GSI Instrument Details

Instrument Name – Name of the type of instrument/analyzer being used.

50

Default Modbus TcpIp Port – The TCPIP port number the Modbus is using, which is usually Industry Standard Port 502 used to communicate with the slave.

Default Modbus Code – The ID code for the slave address, which is usually 100.

Default Modbus Command Type – The command ID for the function code, which is usually 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 15, & 16.

Default Timeout (ms): - If a timeout needs to be set click in the field and type in the number or use the radio buttons to enter in the number, which is set in milliseconds.

Supports Force Multiple Coils – Defaults to enabled for the use of multiple coils.

51

4.6 Data Source Details

To setup the logger information, single click Data Source Details from the Configuration Editors menu.

The Data Source Details tab will open on the right side of the screen. This tab has a tree menu that expands each System’s Sites and their Loggers once they have been created. Expand each Logger to show the channels, calibrations, digital events, and average alarms. Each setup is described below.

4.6.1 Loggers

To add a new logger, single click the Site name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top, and select Logger. A new Logger tab will open on the right side of the screen that has three sub-tabs; Logger, IO Labels, and Math Constants, each of which have multiple sections and fields which are described below.

To open an existing logger, expand System and the Site in the tree menu to show the list of loggers.

Double click the logger name to bring up the Logger Name tab.

To delete a logger, single click the logger name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select the

Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the logger or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the logger. However, the logger cannot be deleted if it has existing channels.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Source tab – This tab has two sections.

Source Information section

Site – Grayed out to show it cannot be edited and is propagated from the Site/Parameter configuration screen.

Source Name – This is the data acquisition and control device that collects data from monitoring instruments (sensors), averages it, stores it temporarily, and passes it to the PC on request.

Control functions include calibration control, alarms, and digital event programs.

Enabled – The site must be enabled before its configuration information can be downloaded to the data logger. If the sited is disabled, the PC cannot poll for information from a disabled site.

Description – Used to describe specifics about the site or its location.

Retry Attempts – This is the total number of times the central PC will repeat sending a command string to a data logger in the event of communication problems. The default is 3.

52

Retry Delay – The amount of time to wait before attempting a communication retry to the logger.

Logger Details section

Logger Identifier – The ID that identifies which logger it is, and how it is referenced during the polling.

Logger Type – Select the type of data logger being used at this site.

Debounce Digital Inputs – Select this option for the input line numbers to remain in a new state for at least one second before the new state is recognized. If not selected, digital transitions take effect as soon as they are detected.

Send Central Messages to Log Book – If central messages are left on the logger, and the automatic polling is setup to poll for central message, checking this box will cause those messages to be written into the logbook in the database.

Send Chart Memos to Annotations - Check this box if the chart memos setup in the logger, if polled are to be written as annotations on the data in the database.

Communication tab

Important! Communication Routes section – This feature cannot be completed until the

Communication Routes have been created in the Server Configuration setup which is covered in

Chapter 4 section 4.13.2. The Communication Routes can also be configured from the Server

Configuration setup screen as well.

Communication Routes section

Create New Route button – Click the Create New Route button to add the route. This will open a new screen where you select the server by clicking the down arrow and selecting the

Executive name from the list. Select if the connection will be made by TCP, Modem, or serial

(which is considered direct connection). Click the OK button to save the settings.

Route – Shows the communication option and executive name that was chosen when the route was created. To add a communication route, single click the blue square with the asterisks to highlight the new row. Put the mouse in the highlighted field under route and a drop down

53

arrow will appear. Click the down arrow and it will drop down a list of communication options where you select the route created in the Server Config from the list.

Priority – If you only have one communication route the priority should be set to 1. If you have more than one communication route setup for a site, then the priority has to be set in order of which route is to be used first to communicate with the site. If another site connection is configured, set the priority to 2. Never leave any of the priority fields set to 0.

Polling – Check this box if the communication route selected is to poll the site. If you have only one route to communicate with the site then this box will need to be checked.

Emulation – Check this box if the communication route selected is to be able to link to logger. If you have only one route to communicate with the site then this box will need to be checked.

Init Command – This field is only used for sites with T switch or switch boxes. If a switch box is used at a site that needs a command to know how to set the switches, enter in the command that is to be used. The command will be sent after the modem opens the connection.

Final Command – This field is only used to sites with T switch or switch boxes. Enter in the command that is needed to tell the switch the string is finished. The command will be sent before the connection disconnects.

IO Labels tab

Inputs – Enter in the field the number of inputs that are to be set up. If you are using Modbus do not set this field or it will cause the Modbus columns to become grayed out. It should remain blank.

Outputs – Enter in the field the number of outputs that are to be set up. If you are using

Modbus do not set this field or it will cause the Modbus columns to become grayed out. It should remain blank.

Digital Input Labels section

IO Number – A digital input line number from1 thru 96. This field has been preset.

Name – Input Line 1 thru 96. This field has been preset.

54

Description – Enter in the name of the Input line or description of what it controls.

Modbus Instrument & Modbus Coil – These two fields are mainly for calibration where the digital I/O points are mapped to the logger I/O points. If you do not used Modbus these fields need to remain blank. If you are using Modbus, click the down arrow at the right end of the fields and select from the drop down lists the instrument name and the driver name and coil number that is to be used.

Digital Output Labels section

IO Number – 1 thru 96. This field has been preset.

Name – Output Line 1 thru 96. This field has been preset.

Normally Closed – When a digital output is setup, it state has to be set to normally open or normally closed, so that when the state changes it will be detected. Check the box if the state is normally closed. Leave the box unchecked if the state if normally open.

Description – The name of the Output line or description of what it controls.

Modbus Instrument & Modbus Coil – These two fields are mainly for calibration where the digital I/O points are mapped to the logger I/O points. If you do not used Modbus these fields need to remain blank. If you are using Modbus, click the down arrow at the right end of the fields and select from the drop down lists the instrument name and the driver name and coil number that is to be used.

Math Constants tab - math constants can be used to represent parameters in the system that need to be changed only occasionally. The user can configure up to 32 math constants that can be used in equations for math pack channels in the Math Constants configuration screen. Calibration results and base averages can also be written to a math constant.

Number – This field has been preset.

55

Name – The name of the constant which is referred to as the capital letter K with a number to follow. This field has been preset.

Primary Value – Enter in the constant value that is to be used in the formulas for the math pack channels.

Secondary Pattern – When clicking in this field it brings up a Secondary Input Pattern box to specify which input lines will control the status changing condition.

Secondary Value – Secondary value based on digital inputs can also be defined for the math constants. These were designed for fuel-switching systems, which must constantly adjust the fuel factor and can provide digital inputs representing the exact fuel loaded.

Tertiary Pattern - When clicking in this field it brings up a Tertiary Input Pattern box to specify which input lines will control the status changing condition.

Tertiary Value – Tertiary values based on digital inputs can also be defined for the math constants. These were designed for fuel-switching systems, which must constantly adjust the fuel factor and can provide digital inputs representing the exact fuel loaded.

Description – These fields have been preset.

Analog Outputs tab – Analog outputs are used to output the result of a calculation performed by the

Logger. Any channel can be used to drive the outputs, the unit may even be used as a simple voltage to current loop converter if desired (i.e., a current loop output driving the result of a single analog input).

DAC Channel Number – Type in the Digital-to-Analog Converter channel number.

Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the channel that

Interval – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the data type that will be affected.

High Input – The high reading in engineering units of the driving input.

Low Input – The low reading in engineering units of the driving input.

56

High Output – The high value of the analog output corresponding to the High Input in mA.

Low Output – The low value of the analog output corresponding to the Low Input in mA.

Action On Error – The action to take when the input parameter has been flagged with an error code indicating bad data. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list:

Ignore - continue to output values normally

Zero - hold output at 0mA

Hold - hold output at the last good output setting

Lowval – hold output equal to 0.0 EU). For instantaneous data, this action is taken when one or more of the following flags exists: R, -, +, A, U, O, M, C, B, F, T, D or P. For an average interval, this action is taken when the < flag is present. A current output can be set to a constant value by setting both the Low Output and High Output fields to the desired value.

4.6.2 Instruments

Direct polling of an instrument is an optional feature and a license has to be purchased before the instrument setup can be used.

To add a new instrument, single click the Site name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the

Ribbon at the top, and select Instrument. A new Instrument tab will open on the right side of the screen which has multiple fields which are described below.

To open an existing instrument, expand System and the Site in the tree menu to show the list of instruments. Double click the instrument name to bring up the Instrument Name tab.

To delete an instrument, single click the instrument name in the tree menu that you want to remove.

Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the instrument or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the instrument.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Source tab

Source Information section

57

Site – Defaults to the name of the site the instrument is being created for and is grayed out to indicate that it cannot be changed.

Source Name – Enter in a name that identifies the instrument.

Enabled – Click to check the box if this instrument is to be used.

Description – Enter in a description for the instrument or for what it is used for. This is not a required field and can be left blank.

Retry Attempts – This is the total number of times the central PC will repeat sending a command string to an instrument in the event of communication problems. The default is 3.

Instrument Details section

Instrument Type – Click the down arrow and select an instrument name from the drop down list.

Instrument Identifier – Enter in the identifier number for the instrument.

Instrument Password – Enter in the password for the instrument if it requires one for communication.

Communication tab

Important! Communication Routes section– This feature cannot be completed until the

Communication Routes have been created in the Server Configuration setup which is covered in

Chapter 4 section 4.13.2. The Communication Routes can also be configured from the Server

Configuration setup screen as well.

Communication Routes section

Create New Route button – Click the Create New Route button to add the route. This will open a new screen where you select the server by clicking the down arrow and selecting the

Executive name from the list. Select if the connection will be made by TCP, Modem, or serial

(which is considered direct connection). Click the OK button to save the settings.

58

Route – Shows the communication option and executive name that was chosen when the route was created. To add a communication route, single click the blue square with the asterisks to highlight the new entry. Put the mouse in the highlighted field under route and a drop down arrow will appear. Click the down arrow and it will drop down a list of communication options where you select the route created in the Server Config from the list.

Priority – If you only have one communication route the priority should be set to 1. If you have more than one communication route setup for a site, then the priority has to be set in order of which route is to be used first to communicate with the site.

Polling – Check this box if the communication route selected is to poll the site. If you have only one route to communicate with the site then this box will need to be checked.

Emulation – Check this box if the communication route selected is to be able to link to logger. If you have only one route to communicate with the site then this box will need to be checked.

Init Command – This field is only used for sites with T switch or switch boxes. If a switch box is used at a site that needs a command to know how to set the switches, enter in the command that is to be used. The command will be sent after the modem opens the connection.

Final Command – This field is only used to sites with T switch or switch boxes. Enter in the command that is needed to tell the switch the string is finished. The command will be sent before the connection disconnects.

4.6.3 Channels

To add a new channel, single click the logger name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the

Ribbon at the top, and select Add Channels. It will open another menu with channel types to choose from. Once you choose the channel type a new Channel tab will open on the right side of the screen that has three tabs; Channel, Validation, and Misc. The Validation tab has the same setup fields for all channel types, but the Channel and Misc. tabs vary in difference or do not exist for each channel type.

Each setup is described below.

To open an existing channel, expand System, site, and logger in the tree menu to show the list of channels. Double click the channel name to bring up the Channel Name tab.

To delete a channel, single click the channel name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select the

Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete

59

the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the channel or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the channel.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Standard Averaging channel

Channel tab – Most of the channels will have identical fields on the Channel tab as the Standard channel setup has, but will be noted on the channels description when fields are different.

Avoid using equation symbols in an instrument name as it can cause problems with math channels if such a channel name is used in a math equation.

General section

Associated Source – This field is already filled in for you as it is propagated from the logger name, and it does not allow you to edit it.

Channel Type – Click the down arrow and select what type of channel you need for data collection from the drop down list. For a standard type channel select Standard

Averaging.

Channel Number – Use the radio button to select the logical number of the channel being configured.

Channel Name – Enter the parameter name for a single monitored pollutant, meteorological parameter or other measured entity. If you do not type in the name that you want used, it will default to Chan and a number that will represent the number of the channel in the channels list.

Enable Channel – Click to check the box to enable the channel to be downloaded to the logger.

Parameter – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down pollutant list propagated from the Site/Parameter configuration editor.

Base Average

Average Interval – The data logger will average instantaneous readings over the

Base Avg Interval, which defaults to one minute and is entered in as 001M. To change the interval click the down arrow and select another interval type from the drop down list.

Storage Time – This is the length of time the data logger will store base averages. Use the radio buttons to select the time or click in the field and type in a value from 0 to 999. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the time span: S = seconds, M = minutes, H = hours, D = days.

60

Extended Averages section

Extended Average 1

Average Interval – The averaging interval for the first extended average defaults to 15 minutes and is entered in as 015M. This is not an average of instantaneous readings, but an average of the Base Average. If the Base Average

Interval is 1 minute, then the first extended average may be an auxiliary, hourly, or daily interval type (of which have to be divisible by 60). To change the interval click the down arrow and select another interval type from the drop down list.

Storage Time – Same type of field as explained for the base storage time field.

Extended Average 2

Average Interval – The averaging interval for the second extended average defaults to one hour and it entered in as 001H. This field must use a higher interval type than Average Interval 1, and must be a multiple of the Base

Average Interval. To change the interval click the down arrow and select another interval type from the drop down list.

Storage Time – Same type of field as explained for the base storage time field.

Averages that can be collected are:

Second data in seconds are: 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 30

Minute data in minutes are: 1, 2, 3, or 4

Auxiliary data in minutes are: 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 30

Hourly data in hours are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, or 12

Daily data in days is: 1

Validation tab – All of the channels will have identical fields on the Validation tab as the

Standard channel setup has. The validation has columns for each of the three average intervals.

Average Level Validation section

61

Base Average, Extended Average 1, Extended Average 2 sections

High-High Alarm Limit (H) – Enter the high compliance alarm limit in engineering units (exceedance limit) for the base average and each extended average. Any average exceeding this limit will be marked with an “H” alarm flag, which is also marked as invalid data.

High Alarm Limit (h) – Enter the warning level high alarm limit in engineering units for the base average and each extended average. The value can be specified separately for all three averaging intervals. Any average exceeding this limit will be marked with an “h” alarm flag.

Both High and High-High alarm limits can be used to describe an alarm condition for the same parameter. The High alarm limit might be used to define a warning threshold and the High-High alarm limit to specify a standard violation.

Low Alarm Limit (l) – Enter the warning low alarm limit in engineering units for the base average and each extended average. Any average below this limit will be marked with an “l” alarm flag.

Low-Low Alarm Limit (L) – Enter the compliance low alarm limit in engineering units (exceedance limit) for the base average and each extended average. Any average below this limit will be marked with an “L” flag, which is also marked as invalid data.

High ROC Alarm Limit (J) – Rate of Change. Enter the error threshold in engineering units for the difference between one average and the next. Any difference that exceeds this limit will be marked with a “J” alarm flag.

Low ROC Alarm Limit (j) – Enter the warning threshold in engineering units for the difference from one average to the next. Any difference below this limit will be marked with a “j” alarm flag. The alarm limit can be specified separately for all three averaging intervals.

Floor Limit (f) – Enter a minimum value in engineering units for each averaging interval. If the average falls below the floor limit, the average will be marked with an “f” information flag and the average will be replaced with a specified floor value.

Floor Value – Enter the value in engineering units. This field will replace an average in the event the average falls below the floor limit.

Percent Valid – This field specifies the percentage of valid data points required for an average to be marked as valid. Any average that falls below this percentage will be flagged with “<” to indicate it is invalid. Valid values are 1-

100.

Example: If you enter 75 in the Percent for Valid Average field for hourly averages and 15 minutes of the hours was invalid, the hour will be marked as valid.

62

Ceiling Limit (c) – Enter a maximum value in engineering units for each averaging interval. If the average exceeds the ceiling limit, the average will be marked with a “c” information flag and the average will be replaced with a specified ceiling value.

Ceiling Value – Enter a value in engineering units. This field is used to replace an average that exceeds the ceiling limit.

Overwrite Math Constant – If a math constant (K01 through K32) is entered in the field, the average interval value will be written to that math constant each time the average is calculated. Click the down arrow and select the constant you want to use from the drop down list. Select a separate math constant for each average interval.

Information Flags section

Digital Info#1 (V), #2 (W), #3 (X), #4(Z) Status – When one or more input status lines cause a V, W, X, Y, or Z information flag to be appended to averaged data, the Digital Info Status (#1 - #5) buttons are used to define the conditions.

Bad Status Inputs (B) – Use the Bad Status Lines (B) screen to specify which input status lines will be monitored for an off or on state. Entries here determine which input lines will be monitored for data flags. Data will be flagged when the specified Off/On line conditions occur, according to the Or/And selection at the bottom of the screen. When specified lines are in the designated state, the associated data will be marked with a “B” validation flag.

Maintenance Inputs (M) – The input line pattern in the Maintenance Status Line screen is used to signify maintenance being performed. The associated data will be marked with an “M”, which is a validation flag.

Max Readings (+) – Enter

t

he highest allowable instantaneous reading in engineering units. The data will be flagged with a “+” validation flag if any instantaneous value is equal to or more than this limit.

Min Reading (-) – Enter the lowest allowable instantaneous reading in engineering units.

The data will be flagged with a “−” validation flag if any instantaneous value is equal to or less than this limit.

Rate of Change (R) – Enter the maximum allowable difference from one reading to the next in engineering units. The data that the data logger receives from the analyzers will be flagged with an “R” validation flag if there is a difference that exceeds this limit between one reading and the next.

Example: If the Rate of Change Limit is set to 10, the current reading is 5, and the next is

20, the data will be flagged.

63

Misc. tab – Some of the channel types do not have the Misc. tab as an option, but will be noted on the channels description when tab exists and the fields are different. If the channel has been enabled to be downloaded to the logger, and the fields on the Misc. tab are left blank; the logger will fill in these settings in its setup with the minimum settings that it can use, which can cause the stored values to be calculated incorrectly.

Analog Input section

Analog Input Number – Use the radio button to select a number that specifies the actual physical input line. The input numbers do not have to be entered in succession.

High In Voltage/mA – In the text box, enter the high voltage or current input to the data logger from the instrument. Typical values are -10 to +10 V for a voltage card and 4 to

20 mA for a current card.

Low In Voltage/mA – In the text box, enter the low voltage or current input to the data logger from the instrument. Typical values are -10 to +10 V for a voltage card and 4 to

20 mA for a current card.

High Out Eng Units – In the text box, enter the high reading of the instrument, in engineering units, corresponding to the High Input. Enter up to six digits.

Example: If the high input to the data logger from the instrument is 10V when the output reading of the instrument is 50°C, then a High Input of 10V indicates a corresponding High Output of 50°C.

Low Out Eng Units – In the text box, enter the low reading of the instrument, in engineering units, corresponding to the Low Input. Enter up to six digits.

Example: If the low input to the data logger from the instrument is 0V when the low output reading of the instrument is 0ºC, then a Low Input of 0V indicates a corresponding Low Output of 0ºC.

64

Average Math Pack channel – Average math pack channels function like math pack channels except instead of performing calculations on instantaneous readings and then averaging the results, these channels wait until the end of an averaging interval and perform calculations on the averages. Any equation using operators other than addition or subtraction will yield different results using this method. The Average Math Channel configuration screen is identical to the Math Channel configuration screen except for the channel name, number, and type. The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel.

Misc. tab

Round Constituents – Check this field to round the sampled constituents to the number of places specified in the Decimal Positioner field before the equation and average are calculated.

Math Pack Equation – Enter an equation in the Equation text box to define the Math Channel result. It can be entered just as it would be on a calculator, but equations must be terminated by an equal sign (=).

General channel – Used to evaluate data in six different channel types: accumulative, maximum, minimum, number of valid runs, percent complete number of runs, and difference – which is a setting that can only be used on an 8872 logger only. For example, a general channel can store the maximum one-minute average for each hour. The Validation tab has the same setup fields as the Standard channel. The fields under the General section are the same as the setup of the standard channels minus the interval and storage time fields.

Misc tab

Specific section

Input Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down the data type you want the general channel to be based on, such as minute our hourly data.

Input Channel Number – Use the radio button and select the channel number of the configured channel that will be the data source.

General Value Duration – Enter how long the data will be collected for the Input Average

Interval value.

65

General Value Storage Time – Enter the length of time the data logger stores data for this channel.

Data Channel Type – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which type of data you want to use; accumulative, maximum, minimum, number of valid runs and percent complete number of runs.

Ignore Input Channel Flag(s) – Click the Channel Flags button and a pick list will open where you select the flags you want to ignore when verifying the validity of the current data point.

Reset Input Status Pattern (Max of 8) – Click the Status Pattern button to select the line numbers and set the Off or On status. When the pattern is met, a reset will be generated to the general channel based on the Data Channel Type at the next Input Average Interval.

GSI channel –Generic Serial Interface channel is a serial communications interface used by the data logger to retrieve data from devices such as analyzers and digital control systems. The interface can receive data strings and stores values into GSI Channels for data collection. The interface can also receive alarm strings or send strings to an analyzer to execute functions like calibrations, either on a repeating timed basis or on a given status input pattern. The Channel and Validation tab are the same as the Standard channel with an additional field on the Channel tab called Hold Data Between Updates? is set to Yes or No. If Yes is selected it will use the last value received until the next value arrives. The default is Yes.

Misc tab

GSI Driver Info section

Driver Instrument – Click the down arrow and select the driver from the drop down list that best suits your instrument.

Driver Parameter – Click the down arrow and select the GSI parameter from the drop down a list the driver is associated with.

Serial Port – Use the radio buttons to select the port number that is to be used by using the radio buttons, or you can click in the field and delete the current number and type in the new port number, or you can highlight the current number and type over it.

Using Dongle? - The dongle is used when daisy chaining Thermo analyzers in serial, because their response does not include the ID of the analyzer sending the response. The dongle helps the logger figure out which analyzer is sending the response. The default is set to No.

Hold Data section

Hold Data Between Updates? – Select Yes or No if the data is to be help from the previous update to the next. It is defaulted to No because this feature has not been implemented at this time in the logger.

66

Linear Sigma channel – takes data from an analog input to calculate a standard deviation/mathematical sigma on three averaging intervals. The base and extended intervals all calculate their averages using instantaneous data, i.e., the extended averages have no dependency on the base average. The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel.

Misc. tab

WDR Analog Input Number – If using a met card this setting would be D1. If using a voltage card it would be the analog input you chose to use.

WDR High In Voltage and WDR Low In Voltage – The high and low input voltage settings of the met equipment.

WDR High Out Voltage and WDR Low Out Voltage – The high and low output EU’s of the met equipment.

Math Pack channel – Math pack channels are useful when special functions are required. Math pack channels are used to calculate results by combining information from other channels and/or constants according to user-defined equations. The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the

Standard channel.

Misc. tab

Round Constituents – Check this field to round the sampled constituents to the number of places specified in the Decimal Positioner field before the equation and average are calculated.

Math Pack Equation - Enter an equation in the text box to define the Math Channel result. It can be entered just as it would be on a calculator, but equations must be terminated by an equal sign (=).

Modbus channel – The Modbus channel type is used to take data from a distributed control system over a Modbus link. The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard and GSI channels.

Misc. tab

Hold Data Between Updates? – Select Yes or No if the last value received is to be used until the next value arrives.

Modbus tab

Modbus Instrument – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the name of the

Modbus instrument.

Driver – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the driver used to communicate with the instrument.

67

Rainfall channel – If the optional meteorological input card was purchased for the data logger, this channel will be available. Rainfall channels calculate accumulation by counting the number of pulses received during the averaging interval, typically received from a tipping bucket rain gauge. This count is then scaled to engineering units, usually inches of rain per hour. The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel.

Misc tab

Analog Input Channel – If using a met card in the logger, enter in R1.

Counter Input - Enter the number of pulses that will equal one engineering unit.

Channel Output - Enter the number of engineering units corresponding to the number of pulses counted (Counter Input).

Rolling channel - Rolling channels calculate an extended rolling average from another channel’s average, such as hourly averages rolling on the minute. The rolling average is updated when the base average is updated. For example, if the base average interval is one minute and the rolling average interval is one hour, the rolling average channel will store a new data point every minute; each data point will be an average of the previous 60 one-minute averages. The Validation tab has the same setup fields as the

Standard channel, and the Channel tab has the General section the same as the Standard channel.

Misc. tab

Input Channel – Click the down arrow and select the channel that will be used as the input for the rolling channel average.

Input Interval – This field defaults to minute data, but if minute data is not to be used, click the down arrow and select the interval that will be used to input into the rolling channel averages.

Duration – Use the radio buttons and the down arrow to select the length of time the data will be collected for each average.

Exclude Offline Data? – Click the box to enable if the offline data is to be excluded. If not, leave the box unchecked.

Clear at Rolling Interval? - Click the box to enable if the value is to be cleared when it is time for the interval to roll. If not, leave the box unchecked.

Storage Time - Use the radio button and down arrow to select the length of time the data will be stored.

Sigma Theta - A meteorological input card needs to be installed in the logger for this channel to work properly. The logger can calculate the sigma-theta of an initialized wind direction. Sigma-theta is the calculation of the standard deviation of wind direction. If the wind never changes the sigma would be 0.

68

If the wind direction is changing frantically, it will approach 50 to 60, which gives an estimate of atmospheric stability. If sigma-theta has a high number, it can be rated by classes: A, B, C, D, E, and F.

Meteorological input cards can be designated in the analog input number field as D1 (for wind direction channels) and S1 (for wind speed channels). The loggers use the EPA-approved Yamartino single-pass algorithm, and have software protection against zero sigma “blowup” caused by small rounding errors.

The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel, but only has one average interval and storage time on the Channel tab.

Misc. tab

RMS Average Details section

Average Interval - Click the down arrow and select the interval data type from the drop down list.

Storage Time - Use the radio button and down arrow to select the length of time the data will be stored.

WDR Analog Input Number – If using a met card this setting would be D1. If using a voltage card it would be the analog input you chose to use.

WDR High In Voltage and WDR Low in Voltage – The high and low input voltage settings of the met equipment.

WDR High Out Voltage and WDR Low Out Voltage – The high and low output EU’s of the met equipment.

Vector Wind Speed channel – If the optional meteorological input card was purchased for the data logger, these channels will be available. The Vector Wind Speed Channel computes average wind speed as a vectored average. A corresponding Vector Wind Direction Channel must also be configured to support the Vector Wind Speed Channel. Zero crossovers and 0-540 degree instruments are automatically supported by the data logger. If a met card was not purchased you can use a voltage card.

If you have scalar wind channels setup, you can use their inputs for the vector setup as well. The

Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel.

Misc. tab

WSP Analog Input Number – If using a met card this setting would be S1. If using a voltage card it would be the analog input you chose to use.

WSP High In Voltage and WSP Low in Voltage – Enter in the high and low input voltage settings of the met equipment.

WSP High Out Voltage and WSP Low Out Voltage – The high and low output EU’s of the met equipment.

69

Vector Wind Direction Channel – Companion channel field. The Wind Direction and Wind

Speed channels are companion channels and work off of each other so if the Report Channel

Number is 07 for the Wind Speed, then the companion channel of the Wind Direction needs to be 06 or 08. Before this field can be filled in both the vector wind and vector speed channels have to be created and saved, then you can go back and fill in the companion channel field.

Once this field has been filled in, it is very important to click out of the field so that SQL sees the field has been completed, otherwise it will not save the setting and will blank out the field when the save button is selected.

Vector Wind Direction channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the

Standard channel.

Misc. tab

WDR Analog Input Number – If using a met card this setting would be D1. If using a voltage card it would be the analog input you chose to use.

WDR High In Voltage and WDR Low in Voltage – The high and low input voltage settings of the met equipment.

WDR High Out Voltage and WDR Low Out Voltage – The high and low output EU’s of the met equipment.

Vector Wind Speed Channel – Companion channel field. The Wind Direction and Wind Speed channels are companion channels and work off of each other so if the Report Channel Number is 07 for the Wind

Direction, then the companion channel of the Wind Speed needs to be 06 or 08. Before this field can be filled in both the vector wind and vector speed channels have to be created and saved, then you can go back and fill in the companion channel field. Once this field has been filled in, it is very important to click out of the field so that SQL sees the field has been completed, otherwise it will not save the setting and will blank out the field when the save button is selected.

Vector Wind Speed (GSI) channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the

Standard channel.

Misc tab

GSI Input Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the input channel into providing the data to the GSI channel.

Companion Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the Vector Wind

Direction (GSI) channel.

Vector Wind Direction (GSI) channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel.

70

Misc tab

GSI Input Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the input channel into providing the data to the GSI channel.

Companion Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the Vector Wind

Speed (GSI) channel.

Scalar Wind Direction (GSI) channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the

Standard channel.

Misc tab

GSI Input Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the input channel into providing the data to the GSI channel.

Scalar Wind Speed (GSI) channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the

Standard channel.

Misc tab

GSI Input Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the input channel into providing the data to the GSI channel.

Wind Speed channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel. The Misc tab has the same setup at the Vector Wind Speed channel, minus the Vector Wind

Direction Channel field.

Wind Direction channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel. The Misc tab has the same setup at the Vector Wind Speed channel, minus the Vector Wind

Speed Channel field.

Stream-Switched Averaging channel -

Stream switch channels allow the data logger to monitor one analyzer that is time-shared between two sampling trains. It forms a base average and two extended averages from another channel, and accepts data from that input channel only when an on-line digital input status is met. If this condition is not met, the data can be designated as invalid, or the data (last good reading, base average, extended average, or average) over the previous on-line period may be “held” until the on-line status condition is met. When stream switch channels are controlled by digital event programs or are calibrated using automatic calibration programs, the digital program or calibration timing may not line up exactly with the stream switch channels averaging periods. Calibrations and event programs should be

71

configured to end a few seconds before the start of the next base average.

The Channel and

Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel.

Misc. tab

Input Channel Number – Will default to the channel number of the channel unless changed by the user.

Purge Time Interval – Use the radio buttons and down arrow to select how often the data is to be purged.

Offline Action – Click the down arrow and select the flag that is to represent the Offline Action.

On-Line Input Status Pattern (Max of 8) – Click the Status Pattern button to bring up the Line

Status Pattern screen to select the status line that are going to be used to control the switching between channels.

4.6.4 Calibrations

To add a calibration, single click the logger name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top, and select Add Calibrations. It will open another menu with calibration types to choose from.

Once you choose the calibration type a new Sequence tab will open on the right side of the screen that has three tabs; Sequence, Phase(s), and Alarms(s). The Sequence tab has the same setup fields for all calibration types with the Automatic cal having a couple extra fields, the Phase(s) tab has the same setup for all cal types minus one of the fields on the Instrument Controlled cal, and the Alarms(s) tab has the same setup for all cal types. Each setup is described below.

To open an existing calibration, expand System, site, and logger in the tree menu to show the list of calibrations. Double click the calibration name to bring up the Sequence Name tab.

To delete a calibration, single click the calibration name in the tree menu that you want to remove.

Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the calibration or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the calibration.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Automatic calibration sequence

Sequence tab – Most of the calibrations will have identical fields on the Sequence tab as the

Automatic calibration setup has, but will be noted on the channels description when fields are different. Click the disk icon at the very top to save the settings.

72

Sequence section

Calibration Type – This field is already filled in for you as it is propagated from the calibration type you selected, and it does not allow you to edit it.

Calibration Name – The name you choose to call the calibration sequence. This field has an eight character limit.

Enabled – Check for the calibration to be downloaded to the logger.

Number of Calibration Records – Determines how long the cal record is stored. The logger defaults to 14 unless changed by the software download. If you use the default of 14 and you run a cal sequence once a day, each cal record will be stored for 14 days.

If you run a cal twice a day, it will cut the time in half because it is now storing two cal records a day, so it will only store them for 7 days. If you run a cal more than twice a day it will get cut again, etc.

Recovery Time – Enter the time required to purge the calibration gases after calibration phases are completed. This function provides a delay before normal sampling and averaging resumes

Repeated Interval – How often you want the cal to run. Such as once a day would be

001D.

Start Time – Click the down arrow and select a date from the drop down calendar when the cal is supposed to start running.

Affected Channels – Channels that are affected by or included in the running of the calibration sequence, in which the hourly data for these channels will be marked with a

C flag to show that it was collected during the running of the calibration. Click the Select box to put a check mark beside of the channel(s) that are to be affected during the calibration.

Phases(s) tab – Has the same setup for all cal types minus one of the fields on the Instrument

Controlled cal.

73

To add a phase, click the Add button above the Sequence tab, then select Phase from the popup menu and it will put a new row under the columns in the Phases section. Do the same when adding channels to the phases, just choose phase channel instead of phase when the option is given. Click the disk icon at the very top to save the settings.

To delete a phase, single click the blue square with the right arrow on the left side of the phase name to highlight the row that you want to delete. Click the Delete button above the Phase(s) tab, then select Phase from the popup menu. It will bring up a message box stating that you have selected to delete Phase: (and give the phase name), then ask if you are sure you want to delete. Click Yes to delete the phase or click No to retain the phase. Do the same when deleting phase channels, just choose phase channel instead of phase when the option is given.

Phases section

Phase Name – A new phase entry will default with name of New Phase and a number depending on which phase number you are at the time of adding the phase. This phase name can be changed to the phase name desired by the user.

Phase Number – Use the radio buttons to select the order in which you want the phases to run. If you want the zero phase to run first then you need to put 1 in the phase number field. If you want Span1 to run second then you would have to put 2 in the phase number field. The phase number will default in sequential order but can be changed by the user. Defaults to one minute (001M).

Duration Type – Enter a time to specify how long the affected lines will be switched on for the phase to run. Defaults to five minutes (005M).

Response Time – Specifies how long data will be averaged during a calibration phase. If the Duration Type is longer than the Response Time, the Response Time occurs at the end of the Duration Type. Referenced in the logger as Data Time.

For example, if the duration is 10 seconds and the response time is five seconds, it will be the last five seconds of the duration. All data collected during the response time will be included in the data for that phase.

Enabled – Check this box to enable the phase to run. If the field is unchecked the phase will not run. Defaults to being disabled on new entries.

Status Pattern – When clicking in this field it brings up a Line Status Pattern box where you can select the lines that will control the calibration phase. You can select up to 8 output lines. If you select more than 8, all of the output lines that are above 8 must be set up in the data logger manually. A list of the input lines and their on/off states that signal the beginning of this phase of an instrument controlled calibration.

Level – Applies to those who have the Calibration Adjust Tool to identify the calibration levels, such as zero, span, or precision, regardless of how they are named. This field is also used to allow the Precision phase of a cal to be identified and reported on the AQS report when the Cal Precision Data Records box is selected on the report query. Click

74

the down arrow and select from the dropdown list, ZERO, SPAN, PREC, 20%, 40%, 60%, or 80%.

Phase Channels section

Channel – Click the down arrow and select a parameter that will be affected by the calibration, from the drop down list. When adding a phase channel the Channel field is blank by default.

Expected Value – Enter a value in this text box to specify the expected value of the calibration for the phase. Enter a number, in engineering units, or a constant (e.g., K3).

The expected value is the (numerical) bottle value. The default is zero for new entries.

Expected Value From Constant – The expected value held in a math constant can be used for the calibration. To use the expected value from a constant click the down arrow and select the constant you want to use from the drop down list.

Warning Drift Limit – Enter the maximum amount each calibration result is allowed to differ from the expected value, in engineering units or percentage. The default is zero for new entries. This field represents the Warning Drift Tolerance field in the logger. If this field is set in the logger, the logger will put a d flag on the calibration data, which will be polled back and show on the cal data in the Calibration Data Editor and on the

Calibration Results report. If you do not want this field to be set in the logger, remove the zero and leave the field blank and it will leave the field in the logger not set when the calibration information is downloaded to the logger.

EV for Auto Correct – The Use EV (expected value) for Automatic Correct defaults to disabled on new entries. Check the box to set the field to Y in the logger. If this field is set to Y in the logger a parameter for one phase, a zero adjust is performed. If this field is set to Y for two phases, a linear rescaling is performed. If this field is set to Y for three phases, a three-point parabolic curve fit is performed. Only standard and rolling average channels may be rescaled. If you want this field to be set to yes in the logger put a check in the box, click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the setting. If this field is set to Y in the logger, the logger will put a z flag on the cal data, which will be polled back and show on the cal data in the Calibration Data Editor and the

Calibration Results report. If you do not want this field to be set in the logger leave the box unchecked and it will leave the field in the logger not set when the calibration information is downloaded to the logger.

Store Calibration Results – Check this box to enable the data point to be stored in the calibration record. Where the data is normally stored, the user may choose that this data point not be stored in the calibration record. This feature may be used when a parameter is in the calibration for correction or write to math pack purposes, but should not be included in calibration records (i.e., if the parameter is not required by regulations to be calibrated). Default is enabled on new entries.

Write Result To Constant – A calibration result can be written to a math constant to be used for other purposes such as in a math pack channel formula. To write the result to a

75

constant click the down arrow and select the constant you want to use from the drop down list.

Error Method – Enter in the method to be used for calculating calibration error:

Difference, Standard, and Linearity. The table in “Calibration Error Calculation” in the data logger manual shows the methods with and without rounding. The default is

Difference to mimic the data logger, which shows the actual difference, not a percentage, between the expected value and the actual value.

The error method calculations the logger performs:

Method Rounding Error Calculation Used

Standard Off (ABS(Actual – Expected) * 100) / Span

Standard

Difference

On

Off

((ABS(Actual~RP – Expected~RP) * 100) / Span~3)~1

ABS(Actual – Expected)

Difference

Linearity

Linearity

On

Off

On

ABS(Actual~RP – Expected~RP)

(ABS(Actual – Expected) * 100) / Expected

((ABS(Actual~RP – Expected~RP) * 100) / Expected~RP)~1

Where: ABS = absolute value

Actual = actual calibration result for the parameter

Expected = configured expected value for the parameter

Span = configured calibration span value for the parameter

~ = rounding operand (a~b means a rounded to b places)

RP = configured rounding precision for the parameter

Write Expected Value To Constant – The expected value can be written to a math constant to be used for other purposes. To write the expected value to constant click the down arrow and select the constant you want to use from the drop down list.

Out of Control Limit – The maximum value of a calibration result can drift for determining out-of-control status. If a calibration exceeds this value, the data will be flagged with a T in the logger to indicate that it is out-of-control. Mainly used for CEMs monitoring, and almost never used in Ambient monitoring. If this field is set in the logger and the calibration drifts past the limit indicated it will mark the calibration data with an o flag, which will be polled back and show on the cal data in the Calibration Data

Editor and the Calibration Results report. The logger will also put a T flag on the hourly data that indicated the cal failed, and the only way to remove the T flag from the data is to make the same cal run again and pass. If you do not want this field to be set in the logger leave the field blank and it will leave the field in the logger not set when the calibration information is downloaded to the logger.

76

Alarms(s) tab - Has the same setup for all cal types.

To add an alarm, click the Add button above the Sequence tab, then select Alarm from the popup menu and it will put a new row under the columns in the Alarms section.

To delete an alarm, single click the blue square with the right arrow on the left side of the alarm name to highlight the row that you want to delete. Click the Delete button above the Phase(s) tab, then select Alarm from the popup menu. It will bring up a message box stating that you have selected to delete Alarm: (and give the alarm name), then ask if you are sure you want to delete. Click Yes to delete the alarm, or click No to retain the alarm.

Alarms section

Alarm Name – When adding an alarm the Alarm Name field is blank by default. Click in the Alarm Name field to type in the name you want to give the alarm to identify the purpose of the alarm.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the alarm. Click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the alarm. The default for new entries is enabled.

Alarm On Cal Drift – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the setting to indicate if the alarm should be generated when the calibration error exceeds the configured Warning Drift Tolerance. Click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the setting. The default for new entries is enabled.

Alarm On Cal Aborted – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the setting to indicate if an alarm should be generated when the calibration sequence is aborted before completion. Click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the setting.

The default for new entries is disabled.

Alarm On Autoscale Failure – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the setting to indicate if an alarm should be generated when the automatic rescaling fails for any reason. Click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the setting. The default for new entries is disabled.

Output To Alarm Port – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the setting to print the alarm (sent to the alarm printer port). The alarm printer port is the default port for all alarm-to-printer notifications. Click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the setting. The default for new entries is disabled.

77

End Alarm On No Flag – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the setting for alarms to be automatically terminated after the Acknowledgment Timeout period. Click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the setting to enforce users to manually acknowledge alarms. If disabled alarms will stay in effect until they are acknowledged by an operator. The default for new entries is disabled.

Ack Timeout Interval – Acknowledge timeout specifies the time-out period before automatic acknowledgment of an alarm. 0 to 999 s, m, h, or d (for seconds, minutes, hours, or days). Use 0s to configure the alarm program without an automatic acknowledgment. Defaults to zero seconds, but can be changed by the user.

StateBit – This setting is only used by the SiteNodeLogger module to track cal alarms that it is generating and managing. If you have not purchased this extra module, then this setting would remain unchecked.

Alarm Output Lines – When clicking in this field it brings up a Line Status Pattern box to configure which output lines to activate in the event of an alarm.

Alarm Input Lines – When clicking in this field it brings up a Line Status Pattern box to specify which digital input lines (2 digits) the data logger will monitor during an alarm.

Monitored Parameters When clicking in this field it brings up a channels box. Select the parameters that are to be monitored by this alarm. If there is more than one calibration alarm set up and both calibrations programs are using the same parameter, they will not overwrite each other.

Instrument Controlled, Interactive (Menu), and User Initiated calibration sequences – The settings for the Sequence, Phase(s), and Alarms(s) tabs are the same as the Automatic calibration setup minus a few fields on each. Instrument calibration is initiated and controlled by external equipment, and the current state is sensed via digital inputs, and cannot be manually started or stopped.

Interactive calibration type uses a menu interface to control data acquisition and to move from one calibration phase to another, and is often used for highly manual procedures such as testing opacity instruments against standard filters.

User Initiated is similar to the Automatic Calibration, but there is no automatic start time or repeat time.

The calibration begins when Start a Calibration Program is selected from the Cal Configuration Menu on the logger. The timing, control, and phase configuration is the same as for an Automatic Calibration.

78

4.6.5 Average Alarms

Average alarms are generated in the logger and received from the logger during the polling process.

To add a new alarm, single click the logger name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top, and select Average Alarm. A new Alarm Program tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing alarm, expand System, site, and logger in the tree menu to show the list of alarms.

Double click the alarm name to bring up the Alarm Program Name tab.

To delete an Alarm, single click the alarm name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select the

Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the alarm or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the alarm.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon at on the Quick Access Toolbar the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Alarm Program Name – Assign a name to the alarm program.

Monitored Parameter(s) – Click the box in the Select column to put a check mark beside of the parameter that is to be affected in the alarm. Click the box again to deselect the parameter. By default no parameters are selected on a new alarm entry.

Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the type of data that will be affected by the alarm from the drop down list.

Output Lines During Alarm button – Click the button in the Select column to put a check mark beside of the of output line that you want to set the condition for the alarm. If you are selecting only one output line you can leave the default of OR selected. If you are selecting more than one output line then you will need to decide if the alarm is triggered by any of the selected lines, which the OR would need to be selected, or if a combination of the output lines will trigger the alarm, which the AND would need to be selected.

Ignore State Changes Flag(s) button – Select the flag(s) that are to be ignored by the alarm.

Flag(s) for Alarm Condition button – Select the flag(s) that are to trigger the alarm.

79

4.6.6 Digital Events

To add a digital event, single click the logger name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the

Ribbon at the top, and select Add Digital Events. It will open another menu with the digital types to choose from. Once you choose the event type a new Event Program tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing digital event, expand System, site, and logger in the tree menu to show the list of events. Double click the event name to bring up the Event Program Name tab.

To delete a digital event, single click the event name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the digital event or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the digital event.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon at on the Quick Access Toolbar the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Timed Event tab

Timed Event Details section

Digital Event Program Name – Enter in the name you choose to identify the digital timed event.

Starting Time – Click the down arrow and select the scheduled execution date and time of the program from the drop down calendar. The default is the current date and time that you create the new event.

Output Duration – The length of time that the Output Control Line(s) will be activated. After this time, the lines will return to their inactive state. The default is 5 seconds because the logger will not accept anything smaller than 5 seconds

Repeat Interval – The time between program executions. The default is 1 day.

80

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the digital event. Click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the digital event.

Calibration Name – The list of calibration program names during which the digital program will update its starting time but will not activate output lines. Click the box beside of the calibration sequence to select the calibrations that are to be ignored.

Output Lines button - The list of the two-digit output control line numbers that should be activated at execution time. Click the box in the Select column to put a check mark beside of the output line that you want to set the condition for the event. If you are selecting only one output line you can leave the default of OR selected. If you are selecting more than one output line then you will need to decide if the event is triggered by any of the selected lines, which the OR would need to be selected, or if a combination of the output lines will trigger the event, which the AND would need to be selected.

Triggered Event tab

Triggered Event Details section – A triggered event has the same settings as the timed event with the exception of not having a Starting Time and Repeat Interval, but does have a Trigger Digital Input

Pattern button.

Trigger Digital Input Pattern button – The digital input line pattern that will trigger the execution of this digital event program. Click the box in the Select column to put a check mark beside of the input line that you want to set the condition for the event. If you are selecting only one input line you can leave the default of OR selected. If you are selecting more than one input line then you will need to decide if the event is triggered by any of the selected lines, which the OR would need to be selected, or if a combination of the input lines will trigger the event, which the AND would need to be selected.

81

Triggered GSI Event tab - These events are used to send GSI strings based on the transition of a digital input, or of a pseudo Digital Input – Digital Output pair in the logger. Commonly, these are used to control RS-232 based calibrators or other devices. For this device, a digital input pattern is defined.

When the logger sees the digital input transition to match this pattern, the GSI string is sent only once out the designated serial port. The string is not resent again until the logger goes to a non-matching input state, and then back to the matching state.

Digital Event Details section

Digital Event Program Name – Enter in the name you choose to identify the digital timed event.

Trigger Digital Input Pattern button – The digital input line pattern that will trigger the execution of this digital event program. Click the box in the Select column to put a check mark beside of the input line that you want to set the condition for the event. If you are selecting only one input line you can leave the default of OR selected. If you are selecting more than one input line then you will need to decide if the event is triggered by any of the selected lines, which the OR would need to be selected, or if a combination of the input lines will trigger the event, which the AND would need to be selected.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the digital event. Click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the digital event.

Serial Port – Type in the serial port being used by the logger for GSI communications.

Output String – Type in the string to be sent out of the GSI port. This string can contain time formatting and time offset characters.

4.6.7 Modbus Instruments

For modbus to be downloaded to the logger the modbus feature has to pre-exist on the logger. This feature is usually purchased along with the purchase of the logger, but can be purchased after the logger has already been put into use. However, if the logger does not have the modbus feature, then there is no need to setup modbus in the software.

To add a modbus instrument, single click the logger name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top, and select Logger Modbus Instrument. It will open a Modbus Instrument tab on the right side of the screen.

82

To open an existing modbus instrument event, expand System, site, and logger in the tree menu to show the modbus list. Double click the instrument name to bring up the Modbus Instrument Name tab.

To delete a modbus instrument, single click the instrument name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the instrument or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the instrument.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon at on the Quick Access Toolbar the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Modbus Instrument tab

Modbus Instrument Details section

Modbus Instrument Name – Enter in the name you choose to identify the instrument.

Driver Type – Click the down arrow and select appropriate driver for the instrument that will be communicating with the modbus.

Modbus Code – Enter in the Modbus ID or Slave ID depending on how it has been setup. The

Modbus ID is unique for each machine and can be set between 1 and 999.

Modbus Command Type – Modbus support commands 1- thru 6, 15 and 16. Only 3, 6, and 16 support floating point operations., which occupy two regular modbus registers. Enter in the command type needed.

Poll Interval (100ms) – Use the radio buttons or type in the number of intervals it is to poll. The interval is broken down into milliseconds, so depending how you type in the number will depend if it is a partial second or whole second. Entering in 5 equals out to be 5 milliseconds or

.5 seconds; 10 would be one whole second.

TCP/IP Address – Enter in the IP address of the instrument and the Modbus ID as both are required with TCP/IP.

TCP/IP Port – The standard TCP/IP that is used and already preset is port 502, and should only be changed under special circumstances.

83

4.7 AQI Program Editor

To setup the AQI Editor, expand Report Configurations from the Configuration Editors menu and single click AQI Program Editor. The AQI Program Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

The AQI Program Editor has been pre-set with the pollutants that are commonly used in AQI reporting, however, if you need to add additional AQI programs click the row with the Asterisk symbol (*) at the bottom of the AQI Program Selection section, and the row will highlight and put the required field symbol beside of the fields that have to be filled in. After filling in the needed fields click on the left end of one of the existing entries in the top section of the AQI Program Selection and the new entry will attach as the bottom row.

To make changes to an existing program, single click the blue square on the left side of the program name to highlight the row, then make the correction to the particular field needing the change.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the AQI Program Editor, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

AQI Program Selection section

Program Name – Click in the program name field on the new entry row and enter in the name you choose to identify the AQI program.

AQS Parameter Type – Click the down arrow to drop down a list of pollutants and select the pollutant along with its AIRS code that you need to report on. This code is what links the AQI setting to the parameter. This code has to match the code that is set in the parameter in the

Site/Parameter screen in order for the parameter to show up on the AQI report.

AQS Unit Type – Click the down arrow to drop down a list of units and select the unit the pollutant is measure in. This code has to match the code that is set in the parameter in the

Site/Parameter screen in order for the parameter to show up on the AQI report.

Average Interval – Click the down arrow to drop down a list of interval types and select the interval for the type of data being report. The requirement for AQI is hourly data, so 001h would be the correct option to select.

Enabled – Check the enable box for the pollutant to be considered in the AQI calculations and included on the AQI report.

Averaging – Click the circle beside of the correct setting for the data of rolling or block. This defines if the average is formed from a rolling number of averages. For example: if a pollutant is normally an 8 hour rolling average, forming a new value every hour from the current hour and the previous 8 hours. A 24 hour block average only have a new value every 24 hours.

Averaging Direction – Click the circle beside of the correct setting for the data of forward or backward. This defines if a multi-hour rolling or block average for a specific hour is calculated

84

using that same hour and the following hours forward, or previous hours backwards. For example: if the pollutant is set to forward average for hour 03 would consist of data for hour 03 through 10.

Rounding Method – Click the circle beside of the correct setting for the data of truncate or round. This determines if the value should be rounded or truncated to the number of digits set in the Decimal Positioner field before entering the calculation. Ozone is normally truncated in the United States, the other pollutants are usually rounded.

Decimal Positioner – Click in the field for the Decimal Positioner on the new entry row and enter in how many places past the decimal are to be displayed.

Average Period - Hours to calculate a total average from.

Scale Factor – If you need to apply a multiplication factor to data for PPM to PPB conversion before comparing against breakpoints. Or you can just use the preset entries of PPM and PPB, or you can enter your own. This is not normally used.

Percent Availability – Click in the field for the Percent Availability on the new entry row and enter in the percent of the average interval that is the minimum percentage of valid readings that must be available to form a valid AQI calculation. The default for this setting is usually 75% or 0.75.

Use Zero Scaling – A zero pollutant means a zero AQI. For pollutants that have the lowest limit set at 50, any value that is below that limit will not show on the AQI report unless zero scaling is selected.

Use Surrogate Forecast – Click the box to enable Surrogate Forecasting to be used on the pollutant. Surrogate Forecast is usually used for Ozone. In the case of forward averages, the

AQI can normally not be calculated in real-time since the calculation depends on data that is not yet available. So AirVision commonly uses algorithms to estimate the 8 hour pollutant’s current and previous values. If selected AirVision will use the algorithms, but if not selected AirVision will only calculate when there is sufficient data to make the calculation.

The Ozone Surrogate uses a simple estimation method:

8 hour Ozone concentration = current hour Ozone concentration * surrogate slope + surrogate intercept.

The slope and intercept can be setup on the site under the Site/Parameter screen.

Use Reff Forecast – This option generates the NowCast that EPA uses to produce the AQI for

PM2.5. This replaces the Conroy Forecast which is no longer used. Click the box to enable Reff

Forecasting to be used on the pollutant.

Computing the NowCast with the Reff Method:

85

1. Compute the concentration range (max-min)

over the last 12 hours. This tells how much

Example 12-hour period:

50 80 75 90 82 53 64 74 21 10 16 13

the air has changed, but relative to what?

Range = 90 -10 = 80 ug/m3

It needs to be scaled.

2. Divide the range by the maximum

Scaled rate of change is 80/90 concentration in the 12-hour period.

3. Compute the weight factor by subtracting the scaled rate of change from 1. The

Weight factor is 1 – 80/90 = .11 -> less than .5, so use .5

weight factor must be between .5 and 1.

The minimum limit approximates a 3 hour

average. If the weight factor is less than .5

then set it equal to .5.

4. Multiply each hourly concentration by the weight factor raised to the power of how

many hours ago the concentration was

measured (for the current hour, the factor

is raised to the zero power).

13*(.5)

0

+16*(.5)

1

+10*(.5)

2

+21*(.5)

3

+74*(.5)

4

+…

5. Compute the NowCast by summing these

products and dividing by the sum of the

weight factors raised to the power of

how many hours ago the concentration

was measured.

13*(.5)

0

+16*(.5)

1

+10*(.5)

2

+21*(.5)

3

+74*(.5)

4

+…

(.5)

0

+(.5)

1

+(.5)

2

+(.5)

3

+(.5)

4

+…

= 17.4 ug/m3

Missing data is handled as such:

To compute a valid NowCast, there must be at least two of the most recent three hours.

I = data

X = No data

If there is a single hour missing, there will be no interruption in the reported NowCast

If there are two of the three hours missing, there will be at least one missing NowCast value.

Hourly data I I I X I I I I I

NowCast I I I I I I I

Hourly data I I I X X I I I I

NowCast I I X X I I I

Hourly data I I I X I X I I I

NowCast I I I X I I I

The weighing of the values does not change.

Each hourly concentration is multiplied by the

Example 12-hour period

50 80 75 90 82 53 64 74 21 10 16 13 weight factor raised to the power of how many hours ago the concentration was measured

86

The example to the right shows the calculation if the next to last value in the 12-hour period was missing

AQI Level Selection section

13*(.5)

0

+16*(.5)

1

+10*(.5)

2

+21*(.5)

3

+74*(.5)

4

+…

(.5)

0

+(.5)

1

+(.5)

2

+(.5)

3

+(.5)

4

+…

To fill in the AQI Level Selection, single click the blue square on the left side of the Program Name to highlight the row in the top section that you want to set the levels for.

Pollutant Level – Click in the Pollutant Level field and enter in the concentration levels of the pollutant. Example: .034, .144, .244, etc.

Sub Index - Click in the Sub Index field and enter in the AQI SubIndexes of the pollutant.

Example: 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, etc.

Description – Click in the Description field and enter in the breakpoints of the pollutant.

Example: Good, Moderate, Unhealthy, etc.

Color – Click the down arrow and select a color from the color selection popup box that you want to assign the index. The default color for Good is green, Moderate is yellow, Unhealthy for

Sensitive Groups is orange, Unhealthy is red, Very Unhealthy is burgundy, and Hazardous is brown.

Font Color – Click the down arrow and select a color from the color selection popup box that you want to assign the fonts. The default is black for the first four levels and white for the last two levels.

Sensitive Groups – Click in the Sensitive Groups field and enter in the statement that best fits the level of the Sub Index and description of the pollutant.

Health Effects - Click in the Health Effects field and enter in the statement that best fits the level of the Sensitive Group.

Health Advisory – Click in the Health Advisory field and enter in the statement that best fits the level of the Health Effect.

87

88

4.8 Violation of Standards Editor

To setup the violation limits, expand Report Configurations from the Configuration Editors menu and single click Violation of Standards Editor. The Violation of Standards Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. As violation programs are added they will appear in the Violation Programs column on the left of the setup screen.

To add a new violation program, select the New button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing violation program, single click the program name in the Violation Programs column to bring up the program settings on the right side of the screen.

To delete an existing violation program, single click the program name in the Violation Programs column that you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the program is immediately remove from the list.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Violation of Standards Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

General section

Program Name – Enter in a name that identifies the violation program.

Parameter Type – Click the down arrow and select the parameter from the drop down list that will be affected by the violation program. For the Ozone Standard select Ozone in this field.

Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the type of data from the drop down list that is to be affected by the violation program. This is usually hourly data.

Violation Limit - Enter the violation of standards limit, in engineering units, for the selected parameter. Data averages in excess of this limit will be shown on the Violation of Standards

Report.

Decimal Positioner - This field will be used to convert floating point numbers from Data Loggers to values with a fixed number of places to the right of the decimal. Valid values are 0 through 4.

For the Ozone Standard this should be set to 2.

Enabled – Check this box if the violation is to be included on the VOS report.

Average Method section

Block or Rolling – Block does not use forward or backward, it is simply the block of hours that are indicated in the Average Periods box. Rolling works in conjunction with the forward and backward setting.

89

Average section

Periods – The number of hours to calculate forward or backward.

Forward or Backward - Indicates whether data included in rolling averages will come before or after the hour selected for the report.

Example: If an eight-hour average for hour 15 of the day is based on hourly data from hour 08 through hour 15, select Backward. If an eight-hour average for hour 15 is to be based on hour

15 through hour 22, select Forward.

Average Type section

Mean – This is a total average.

Annual PM 2.5 Standard, 24-Hour PM 2.5 Standard, 24-Hour PM 10 Standard – These can be hourly or daily sample readings.

8-Hour Ozone Standard – The 8 hour standard required by EPA.

1-Hour SO2 Standard – The 1 hour standard for SO2 NAAQS calculation.

Ozone Season section

Start and End – If ozone is to be reported between specific dates, enter in the date range in the start and end fields.

90

4.9 Wind Rose Levels Editor

To setup the wind rose, expand Report Configurations from the Configuration Editors menu and single click Wind Rose Levels Editor. The Wind Rose Levels Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

As wind rose programs are added they will appear in the Wind/Pollution Rose Programs column on the left of the setup screen.

To add a new wind program, select the New button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing wind program, single click the program name in the Wind/Pollution Rose Programs column to bring up the program settings on the right side of the screen.

To delete an existing wind program, single click the program name in the Wind/Pollution Rose Programs column that you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the program is immediately remove from the list.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Wind Rose Levels Editor, select the disk icon at on the Quick Access Toolbar the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

General section

Program Name Enter in a name you want to identify the rose program.

Plotted Parameter Type – Click the down arrow to select the parameter used for magnitude from the drop down a list, which could be wind or it could be ozone, etc.

Wind Direction Parameter Type – Click the down arrow and select the wind direction parameter that is the companion of the wind speed direction parameter the rose is being configured for.

Program Enabled - Check the enable box for the pollutant to be displayed on the Wind Rose.

Calm if Wind Speed < - Set the level that indicates that the wind speed is calm (e.g., 0 or a low level such as .01). Data below this level is not plotted in the rose.

Class Limits section

Rose Level 1 through 8 and Limit - Use the class limits to set up levels of wind speed. Associate the desired color with each class limit. Meteorologists might have specific levels of wind speed for your geographic location (i.e., Chicago, the windy city, as opposed to Knoxville). Make an entry, in engineering units (e.g., M/S for meters per second), for each class. Class 1 is the lowest limit, which might indicate a small breeze; class 2 is higher than class 1, which might indicate a stronger breeze, etc. Class 8 is for data values that are greater than or equal to class 7, and might indicate a strong gust or an intense wind speed for that particular area.

Example: A limit of <10 in Class 1 would indicate that values less than 10 would be in Class 1.

91

Plot Color – Click the down arrow to drop down a list of colors. There are three tabs to choose from; Custom, Web, or System. Custom has the basic color chart, Web has the web colors and their names, and System has the colors for Windows and their names. Select a color from one of the tabs for each class level.

92

4.10 AIRNow/FTP Setup

To setup the AIRNow transfer program, expand Report Configurations from the Utilities menu and single click AIRNow/FTP Setup. The AIRNow/FTP Setup tab will open on the right side of the screen. This tab has one section called AIRNow Transfer Details which has multiple fields that are described below. As transfer programs are added they will appear in the AIRNow FTP Program Selection column on the left of the setup screen.

To add a new transfer program, select the Add FTP Program button on the Ribbon at the top. The fields will be blanked out on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing transfer program, single click the program name in the AIRNow FTP Program

Selection column to bring up the transfer program on the right side of the screen.

To delete an existing transfer program, single click the program name in the AIRNow FTP Program

Selection column that you want to remove. Select the Delete FTP Program button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the program is immediately remove from the list.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the AIRNow/FTP Setup, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

NOTE: Make sure there are no spaces in any of the fields, especially after entry in the fields.

AIRNow Transfer Details section

Program Name – This is the name that you choose to use to identify the transfer program.

Transfer Method – Click the down arrow and select from FTP, FTP/SSL explicit, FTP/SSL implicit, and SFTP.

FTP is standard File Transfer Protocol.

FTP/SSL explicit is (FTP over SSL – Explicit). Explicit security requires that the FTP client issues a specific command to the FTP server after establishing a connection to establish the SSL link.

FTP/SSL implicit is (FTP over SSL – Implicit). Implicit is a mechanism by which security is

Automatically turned on as soon as the FTP client makes a connection to an FTP server.

SFTP is (SSH File Transfer Protocol) also known as Secure FTP. It encrypts commands and data both, preventing passwords and sensitive information from being transmitted in the clear over a network.

FTP Host – Enter in the EPA’s FTP address provided to you by the EPA. For AIRNow it should be ftp.airnowdata.org.

Directory – Enter in the path of the destination directory provided to you be the EPA. To test the transfer to make sure it is working correctly, use incoming/data/AQCSV_Test. Do not put a forward slash at the end of the path.

93

User Name – Enter in the User ID, SHOperator, which is provided to you by the EPA.

Enable – Click the enabled box to enable the transfer program to function.

Port – Enter in port 21 as required by the EPA.

AIRNow – Click the AIRNow box for the report being transferred to be in the AIRNow format.

Agency – Enter in the Agency Code provided to you by the EPA.

Set User Password button – When selecting this button it brings up a password box where you enter and re-enter in your password, Navi7r, which is provided by the EPA, for confirmation.

94

4.11 Frequency Distribution Editor

To setup the percentage distribution, expand Report Configurations from the Configuration Editors menu and single click the Frequency Distribution Editor. The Frequency Distribution Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. As frequency programs are added they will appear in the Program

column on the left of the setup screen.

To add a new frequency program, select the New button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing frequency program, single click the program name in the Programs column to bring up the program settings on the right side of the screen.

To delete an existing frequency program, single click the program name in the Programs column that you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the program is immediately remove from the list.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Frequency Distribution Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

General section

Program Name – Enter in a name to identify the frequency program.

Parameter Template – Click the down arrow and select a parameter that has a parameter template created for it, from the drop down a list that is to be used for this program.

Lowest <= through Range 9> – Has two columns; Freq Distribution % and Concentration

Distribution. The data that falls into each row show that percentage of data was the particular value or less for the particular channel. Rows 1 - 9 of which 10.00 is the 10% column. Under the

10% is .001. What this means is that 10% of the data or less was .001 out of the 734 samples that were taken for a site, which helps users analyze their data by breaking it down into percentages.

Freq Distribution % column – Ranges that will be used in the calculation of and displayed on the

Frequency Distribution report.

Concentration Distribution column – Ranges that will be used in the calculation of and displayed on the Concentration Distribution report.

95

96

4.12 E-mail Alarm Trigger Editor

This editor is used to email alarm information that is attached to the data as it is retrieved to an email address of your choosing. Once that you have set up the email alarm trigger, you can setup the email addresses that you want to have the email sent to, which is located under Notification Subscriptions under Configuration Editors.

To setup alarm triggers, single click E-mail Alarm Trigger Editor from the Configuration Editors menu.

The E-mail Alarm Trigger Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. As alarm triggers are added they will appear in the Alarms column on the left of the setup screen.

To add a new alarm trigger, select the New Trigger button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing alarm trigger, single click the alarm trigger name in the Alarms column to bring up the alarm trigger setting on the right side of the screen.

To delete an existing alarm trigger, single click the alarm trigger name in the Alarms column that you want to remove. Select the Delete Trigger button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the alarm trigger is immediately removed from the list.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Alarm Trigger Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the settings before exiting this screen.

Alarm Criteria section

Alarm Name – Enter in the name you want to identify the alarm trigger.

Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the data type from the drop down list that will be affected by the trigger.

Enabled – Click to put a check in the box to enable the alarm trigger to function within the software only.

Site - Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop down list that will be affected by the alarm trigger.

Alarm On, Parameter and Description – Click to put a check in the box beside of the parameter you want to select to be affected by the alarm trigger.

Trigger, Flag, and Description – Click to put a check in the box beside of the flag that is to be attached to the data to trigger the alarm.

Inhibit, Flag, and Description – Click to put a check in the box beside of the flag that is to be attached to the data to keep the trigger flag from triggering the alarm. This means that both the trigger flag and the inhibit flag have to be attached to the data on the same interval.

97

Email Notification section

Subject and Message –The text that you want to be included in the subject line and the message body of the email being sent out.

Tag Email as Urgent – Click to put a check in the box to enable the urgent tag to be attached to the email being sent.

Generate Log Book Entry – Click to put a check in the box to have the alarm to create a logbook entry when triggered. The entry will be similar format to what is sent out in the email.

For any flag that has been selected in an alarm that uses limits to decide if the flag is attached to the data, is controlled by the logger. So the limit for the flag(s) has to be setup on the specific parameter(s) in the logger as well as in the Data Source Details setup in the software.

These alarms can only be ran automatically against the data once the data has been polled and written to the database. To setup the Task Scheduler to process these alarms refer to Chapter 4.16.1.e Adding an Alarm Processing task.

To setup the recipient’s email refer to Chapter 4.13 Email Notification Subscriptions.

98

4.13 E-mail Notification Subscriptions

To setup email notifications, single click Notification Subscriptions from the Configuration Editors menu.

The Notification Subscriptions tab will open on the right side of the screen that has two columns. In the left column are the different programs that have been configured, and the right column has group names or user names and emails.

To setup the alarm triggers to be emailed locate Alarms at the top of the left column, and it should have the alarms that have been configured listed below Alarms. Select the alarm program from the list by clicking it once to highlight the name. From the user list in the right column find the user and click the name to highlight the row then click the bottom button in the middle column that states << Subscribe

User. This will put that user under the alarm name that was selected. To assign a group follow the same steps except select the top button in the middle column that states << Subscribe Group.

To setup the reports to be emailed locate Reports at the bottom of the left column, and it should have the reports that have been configured listed below Reports. To setup the ADVP rule triggers to be emailed locate ADVP Rules in the middle of the left column, and it should have the rules that have been configured below ADVP Rules. Repeat the same steps for the reports and ADVP rules as explained for the alarm triggers to set them up.

To remove a user from a program, single click the user you want to remove and click the middle button in the middle that states Remove Subscriber >>, and it will remove the user from the left column.

If a notification has a green check on the envelope it is enabled. To disable it, select the notification and click the Notifications Enabled button on the Ribbon at the top and it will put a red circle with a white dash through the middle on the envelope in the place of the green check. To re-enable the notification, click the Notifications Enabled button again and it will remove the red circle and put the green check back on the envelope.

Any other programs that show in the notification setup screen use the same steps for setting them up for email sending as well.

For AirVision to be able to send emails, it has to be configured to use the email server. This is covered in

Chapter 4.14 Server Configuration.

99

NOTE: In order for the user names and their email addresses to show up in the Notification

Subscriptions screen they have to be setup as a user in the User Editor under Security located in the

Configuration Editors. The User Editor setup is covered in Chapter 10 Security.

If you have setup multiple email addresses for a single user, only the main email address will show in the user list in the Notification Subscriptions screen. The user name and main email name will get assigned to each active notification that you have selected for that user. The email that will receive each notification selected will be the main email as well as the additional email address that was enabled for that notification in the User Editor under Security.

100

4.14 Server Configuration

To setup the server configuration, single click Server Configuration from the Configuration Editors menu.

The Server Configuration tab will open on the right side of the screen. This tab has a tree menu that expands each System’s Executive (or PC’s) and their communication routes once they have been created. Expand each Executive to show the comm routes and service configuration. If the database is on the same pc as the executive, the executive name will be the name of the pc. Each setup is described below.

4.14.1 Executive

An Executive represents an instance of a computer running the AirVision Server process within its operating system. An Executive represents a point that a Client can log into, and also a point where one or more of the background AirVision processes can run.

By default, a single executive running all processes is installed whenever the server is installed with an empty database. If the database already exists with an executive, no new executives are created.

Two executives cannot be ran on the same server. To use a second executive to help with resources a second server will be needed, which also will require a second license that will need to be purchased from Agilaire LLC. To add a second executive, single click the System in the tree then select the Add

Executive button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up a New Executive Options box where the

Name for the executive will default to the pc name but can be changed. All of the Services listed will be selected. To deselect an item simply click the box beside of the service to remove the check mark. The services that are selected will show up under Service Configuration in the tree menu or under the

Service Components tab as Plugin services.

To add or remove these settings to existing executive, single click the executive under the System in the tree menu and select Configure Executive from the Ribbon at the top.

To open an existing executive, double click the Executive name below the System in the tree menu. The

Executive tab will open on the right side of the screen with two tabs that are described below.

To delete an existing executive, single click the Executive name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure

101

you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the Executive or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the Executive.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

Executive tab

General tab

Executive Information section

Executive Name – The default is the pc’s name.

Executive Description – The default is Executive on the pc listed in the Executive Name field, unless it is a new entry then this field will be blank.

Network Address – The default is the pc’s name.

Network Protocol – The default is TCP and should remain at the default. The other option is HTTP and is a place holder in the software for possible future development.

Port – This port is what the client software uses to communicate with the server software whether they are both installed on the same pc or on separate pc’s. The default is 9885 and although the field allows you to change the port number it needs to remain at the default setting in order for the client and server to communicate.

Service Components tab – To enter in a new service component select the blank row with the asterisk, and click the down arrow under Plugin to select one of the options from the list. The options in the list are described below. These options are needed for the scheduled programs and all should remain enabled.

Enabled – Check the box for selected service to function on this server. If the box is checked it means that the service is configured. You can disable specific services instead of deleting them, for example, if you wanted to temporarily turn off one of the services because another server was going to run that service for a short time.

102

Auto Start – Check the box for the selected service to be running on startup. In most cases this needs to be set to True, but there are some cases where it can simply call the service when it is needed. For example Data Access can be set for False, and it will simply be invoked whenever someone requests data. However, things like the polling and file processing need to be set to

True. As a general rule this column should always be set to True unless directed otherwise.

Start Order – This controls which order the services are started. Enter in the field the order number in which you want the selected service to run. For the polling related services you need to make sure the Communication Router is started first before the services that need communication.

4.14.2 Comm Routes

To add comm routes, single click the Executive name under System in the tree menu. There are three communication routes that can be added from the Ribbon above the Main Navigation menu. TCP Route for connection via a TCP/IP connection, Serial Route for direct connection, and Modem Route from the

Central to each of the loggers that use dial up modems.

4.14.2.a Serial Route

To add a serial connection or comport connection, single click the Executive under System in the tree menu and select the Add Serial Route button on the Ribbon at the top. The COM tab will open on the right side of the screen.

Note: A serial route configured on its own is also considered a direct connect for a connection between the PC and the logger using a 9 pin to 9 pin null modem cable. Once a modem is configured on the comport it can no longer be used as a direct connect, and a phone line and modems must be used to communicate between the PC and the logger.

To open an existing COM, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu and double click on the COM. The COM tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To delete an existing COM, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu. Single click the

COM you want to delete and select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the COM or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the COM.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

COM tab

General tab

Serial Connection Details section

103

Route Name – Enter in the name you want to give the comm port.

Comm Port – Enter in the actual comm port number. Example: COM1.

Baud Rate – Enter in the speed the central modem and port should be talking at. The default 9600 is the rate for communicating with the 8816’s and 8832’s.

Data Bits – Default and setting for best results is 8.

Stop Bits – Default and setting for best results is 1.

Parity – This setting if for RS232 and the default is set to None. We recommend leaving it at the default for the best performance.

Advanced section

Read Timeout – The timeout used when trying to read the response before it deems the response empty and gives up. If the field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds.

Recommendation is to leave the field blank.

Write Timeout – The amount of time to allow for sending (writing) data to the device. If the field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds. Recommendation is to leave the field blank.

Disconnect After - The amount of time that should pass before disconnecting in the event that the communication connection has timed out.

Inter-byte Delay (ms) - The amount of time command strings communications will be sent to the logger or instrument with the specified gap between each character. This setting does not affect the responses from the logger or instrument. This will help any sites that drop characters if the command is sent too fast. If the field is blank, it defaults to being null and the entire string will be sent at once. If the field is set to zero, then each character is sent individually with zero milliseconds between them.

104

4.14.2.b Modem

To add a modem for the comport, single click the COM under the Comm Routes in the tree menu and select the Add Modem button on the Ribbon at the top. The Modem tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing modem, expand the Executive, Comm Routes, and the COM in the tree menu and double click on the modem. The Modem tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To delete an existing modem expand the Executive, Comm Routes, and the COM in the tree menu.

Single click the modem you want to delete and select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the modem or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the modem.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

If a site needs to be forced to use a low baud rate different than the other sites, a second modem can be attached to the same comport in the software, even though there is only one physical modem connected to the PC. In the modem profiles define a max baud rate for that modem type. Then when defining the modem route to the slow site, select the Preferred Baud Rate to the slow speed.

Modem tab

Modem Details section

Modem Name – Enter in the name you want to give the modem.

Modem Type – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which modem you are using. If your exact modem is not listed select the closest model in the list to the modem that you have.

Enabled – Check the box to enable this modem to be available for use.

105

4.14.2.c Modem Route

To add a modem route or phone line for the modem to use, single click the Executive under System in the tree menu and select the Add Modem Route button on the Ribbon at the top. The MOD tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing modem route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu and double click on the modem route. The Modem Route tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To delete an existing modem route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu. Single click the modem route you want to delete and select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the modem route or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the modem route.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

MOD tab

General tab

Modem Connection Details section

Route Name – Enter in the name you want to give the route.

Phone Number – Enter in the phone number of the modem at the logger it is to connect to.

Modem – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the modem you set up on the Modem setup screen to use to connect to the logger. Use any available modem should only be selected if there is actually multiple modems connected to multiple comports.

Preferred Modem Baud Rate – This field becomes available when Use any available modem is selected in the Modem field. This field defaults to Any, but is recommended to set it to the baud rate used for the particular sites the particular route was create for.

Redialing Options section

Redial Attempts – Defaults to 1. Use the radio buttons to select the number of attempts to make a connection with the logger modem. NOTE: All of the retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.

106

Time Between Redial Attempts - Use the radio button to select the amount of time, or highlight the value and type in the needed time; click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the type of time. The options are Seconds, Minutes, Hours, and Days.

Advanced Options section

Override Serial Baud Rate – Defaults to Use default, which means it will use the baud rate that was set on the modem setup screen. If a baud rate is selected it will be used instead of the baud rate set on the modem setup screen.

Override Serial Read Timeout – If this field is set, this setting will be used rather than the Read Timeout setting for the timeout that is used when trying to read the response before it deems the response empty and gives up. If this field is left blank and the Read

Timeout is set it will use the Read Timeout setting. If the Read Timeout is left blank then it will default to 60 seconds.

Override Serial Write Timeout – If this field is set, this setting will be used rather than the Write Timeout setting for the amount of time to allow for sending (writing) data to the device. If this field is left blank and the Write Timeout is set it will use the Write

Timeout setting. If the write Timeout is left blank then it will default to 60 seconds.

Connection Timeout – The amount of time that should pass before disconnecting in the event that the communication connection has timed out.

Hang-up Idle Time – Defaults to 5 seconds. Use the radio button to select the amount of time, or highlight the value and type in the needed time; click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the type of time. The options are Seconds, Minutes,

Hours, and Days.

Recommendation is to increase the time to make sure that the connection is not disconnection prematurely. If the logger has a delayed response time coupled with the short idle time could cause the connection to be terminated before the logger has time to understand the string and then send back a response.

107

Devices tab – This is used to assign the route to a specific site. Click the Add Device Route button at the bottom and it will put a new entry at the top. Click the down arrow at the right end of the new entry under the Source column and select which site the route is to be assigned to. Set the priority to 1 for the first entry, and check the boxes for polling and emulation. If another site connection is set up, set the priority to 2. Never leave any of the priority fields set to 0.

4.14.2.d TCP Route

To add a TCP connection, single click the Executive under System in the tree menu and select the Add

TCP Route button on the Ribbon at the top. The TCP tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing TCP route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu and double click on the TCP route. The TCP tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To delete an existing TCP route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu. Single click the TCP route you want to delete and select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the TCP route or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the TCP route.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

TCP tab

General tab

TCP Connection Details section

Route Name – Enter in the name you want to give the route name.

Enabled – Check the box to enable the TCP connection for use.

Network Address – Enter in the required IP address.

Polling port – The default is 9881, and is required by the logger as it is part of the logger’s code. Although the field allows you to change the port number, it needs to remain at the default setting in order for the logger to communicate with the automatic or manual polling.

Emulation Port - The default is 9887, and is required by the logger as it is part of the logger’s code. Although the field allows you to change the port number, it needs to remain at the default setting in order for the logger to communicate through the link to logger function.

108

Read Timeout – The timeout used when trying to read the response before it deems the response empty and gives up. If the field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds.

Recommendation is to leave the field blank.

Write Timeout – The amount of time to allow for sending (writing) data to the device. If the field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds. Recommendation is to leave the field blank.

Disconnect After – The amount of time that should pass before disconnecting in the event that the communication connection has timed out.

Inter-byte Delay (ms) – The amount of time command strings communications will be sent to the logger or instrument with the specified gap between each character. This setting does not affect the responses from the logger or instrument. This will help any sites that drop characters if the command is sent too fast. If the field is blank, it defaults to being null and the entire string will be sent at once. If the field is set to zero, then each character is sent individually with zero milliseconds between them.

Devices tab – This is used to assign the route to a specific site. Click the Add Device Route

button at the bottom and it will put a new entry at the top. Click the down arrow at the right end of the new entry under the Source column and select which site the route is to be assigned to. Set the priority to 1 for the first entry, and check the boxes for polling and emulation. If another site connection is set up, set the priority to 2. Never leave any of the priority fields set to 0.

4.14.3 Service Configuration

To add Service Configurations they have to be selected when the Executive is configured, or by single clicking the Executive, then selecting the Configure Executive button on the Ribbon at the top and selecting the options from the list. The options that appear under Service Configuration are the Email

Service, Import Service, Logger Driver, and Instrument Manager. The Logger Driver can have a logger added from the Ribbon above the Main Navigation menu, as well as the Instrument Manager can have an instrument added.

109

4.14.3.a Email Service

To open the existing email service, expand the Executive and Service Configuration by clicking in the tree menu and double click on the Email Service. The Email Service tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To delete the existing email service, expand the Executive and Service Configuration in the tree menu.

Single click the Email Service and select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select OK to continue deleting the email service, select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the email service.

Email Service

Email Service tab

Email Setup section

SMTP Server – The defaults to the name of the executive, but can also be changed to the email domain address or the IP address of the email server.

Port – Enter in the port number the email server uses.

From address – Enter in the address that is to show as the sender on the email. This field needs to be in the format of an email address.

Example: [email protected]

Send email per recipient – Check the box if you want the email to be sent to each email that has been setup in the Notification Subscriptions setup screen.

Failed Email Retry Interval – If the original email fails to send and you want it to be sent again enter in the interval, which is in seconds, on how long to wait in between retries.

Retry Attempts – Use the radio buttons to select or click in the field or type in how many times you want the email to try to send.

Polling frequency (sec) – Use the radio buttons to select or click in the field or type in how many seconds you want the email service to look for anything to send. This feature will run throughout the whole day as long as the AirVision Server service is running.

Authentication Required – If this box is checked the below mentioned fields will show on the screen.

Enable SSL/TLS – Click to put a check in the box to enable is a certificate of authentication for security that requires password.

110

Authentication Criteria section

Username – If the email server requires a username to allow emails to be sent, enter the username into this field.

Password – If the email server requires a password along with the username to allow emails to be sent, enter the password into this field.

Domain (if needed) – Enter in the domain name if it is required by the email server to allow emails to be sent.

4.14.3.b Import Service

The Import service works in conjunction with the direct polling of an instrument, which is an optional module that does not come with the standard software package and has to be purchased in addition to the standard software package.

To add an import service, double click Import Service in the tree menu. The Import Service tab will open on the right side of the screen. Then select the Site Mapping button at the bottom and it will put a blank row on the right side of the screen with blank fields that are explained below.

To open the existing import service, expand the Executive and Service Configuration in the tree menu and double click on Import Service. The Import Service tab will open on the right side of the screen.

Single click the blue square on the left side of the import template source to highlight the row that you want to make changes to.

To delete the existing Import Service, expand the Executive and Service Configuration in the tree menu.

Single click the blue square on the left side of the source to highlight the row you want to delete, and select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the import service or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the import service.

Import Service

Import Service tab

111

Folder Root (leave null for default): - This is the root folder the import service watches. Any source mappings with relative folder paths will be rooted here. By default it is empty, which means it will use the default of C:\AVServerData\DataFiles. Each mapping entry maps a source to a file import template, and specifies which folder and what types of files to watch for. If the folder path is empty, then the service looks under the <RootFolder>\<SourceName> folder for files. If the folder path is an absolute path (e.g. C:\test\data), then the root folder doesn't affect it. If the folder path is a relative path (e.g. test\data), then the service looks under

<RootFolder>\test\data for the files.

Site – Click the down arrow on the right end of the field and from the drop down list select the site the import is coming from.

Import Template – Click the down arrow on the right end of the field and from the drop down list select the format of the file being imported.

Enabled – Click to put a check in the box to enable the setup of the import to be used by the software.

Filename Pattern – The filename pattern can be *.*, or something more specific like *.rsp, or even more specific than that, like "SITE1LABDATA*.csv", etc . Leaving the field blank is the same as typing in *.*. This is the same as using the command prompt and doing a "dir for a type of file.

Folder Path – This field should remain blank unless you are polling data straight from an instrument and running into errors. Have the data dropped into a folder and configure the source mapping to have the import to look in that folder so it can import the data.

4.14.3.c Logger Driver

To open an existing logger driver, expand the Executive and Service Configuration in the tree menu and double click on the Logger Driver. The Logger Driver tab will open on the right side of the screen.

Logger Driver

Logger Driver tab

Logger Driver Details section

112

Emulation ServerThe default is enabled and the port is set to 9886, and although the field allows you to change the port number, it needs to remain at the default setting in order for the server to communicate with the database.

4.14.3.d Instrument Manager

Before the Instrument Manager can be used to poll an instrument directly a license from Agilaire LLC for

Direct Instrument Polling is required.

To setup an instrument for direct polling refer to Chapter 13.7 Instrument Polling Setup.

113

4.15 Modem Types

To open Modem Types, single click Modem Types from the List Editors menu. The Modem Types tab will open on the right side of the screen.

The Modem Types has been pre-set with a large number of different modems. However, if you need to add additional modems, click the row with the Asterisk symbol (*) at the bottom of the Modem Types screen, and the row will highlight and indicate which fields are required to be filled in. After filling in the needed fields, single click one of the existing modems and the new entry will attach as the bottom row.

To make changes to an existing modem, single click the blue square on the left side of the modem name to highlight the row, then make the correction to the particular field needing the change.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Modem Types, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Research for the modems has been done and the settings have been set for the specific requirements for each modem and should remain with the default settings, especially if the user is unsure of what any of the settings for any of the modems need to be set to.

Modem Description – The name and type of modem.

BPS – The baud rate the modem communicates at.

Command Mode String – If the modem you are using requires a string to operate in command mode enter in the string in this column.

Guard Time (ms) –Configures how much time it should wait after data transmission to look for modem control commands.

Dial Command String – If the modem you are using requires a string to dial enter in the string in this column.

Hangup Command String – For the existing modems this column is defaulted with the hangup strings already set. The default for a logger to hangup with a modem is usually ATH.

Online Mode String – Defines what the modem requires to put it into "online mode". If left empty the default being used is ATO1, which is what the majority of modems use. This field should always be left blank unless specified in the requirements for the modem itself.

Initialization String – For the existing modems this column is defaulted with the strings already set. For any modem that you may add to the list this initialization string will have to be provided by the manual that came with the modem.

114

115

4.16 Task Scheduler

To setup the scheduler, single click Task Scheduler from the Configuration Editors menu. The Task

Scheduler tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add a new task, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open with jobs and tasks to select from, each are described below. You can also add a new task by using the wizard. To run the wizard, select the Run Schedule Wizard button on the Ribbon at the top. The manual setup of each task is explained first and the Schedule Wizard is explained further on in the chapter.

To open an existing task, single click the blue square on the left side of the task name in the Description column to highlight the row. The settings for the selected task will open in the gray area at the bottom of that screen. To run that task immediately, select the Execute Scheduled Task Now button on the

Ribbon at the top.

To delete an existing task, single click the blue square on the left side of the task name in the Description column to highlight the row you want to remove. Select the Delete Scheduled Item button on the

Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you before delete but simply remove the entry.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

4.16.1 Setting up the Task Scheduler Manually

When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task

Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the

Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section at the top.

Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.

Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you want to handle running the task.

116

Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The default is the current date and time that you create the task.

Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the task is to run.

Advanced button – Click the Advance button to open the Schedule Details screen, which will allow the user to set a task to run at specific times or on specific days. The Task Information

section should keep defaulted information, as this is duplicate information of the Task Schedule

Details section from the previous page defining how the task is to run. The Days to Run section allows the user to select what days the task is to run on, or deselect the days the task should not run. The Time of Day Restriction section can be set to Unrestricted to run at the selected interval for the days selected throughout the whole twenty four hours each day, or it can be set to Run only between specific hours for the selected interval for the days selected.

Under Task Details section, the Basic Task Information section under the General tab and the Advanced tab are the same for all tasks as described below.

Task Details Section

General Tab

Basic Task Information section

Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list, which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection section at the top unless given a different name by the user.

117

Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.

Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.

This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled

Task Selection section at the top.

Advanced Tab

Retry Options section

Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the particular poll. It is recommended that this field remain set to 0.

Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.

Status Logging section

Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.

Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom, and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.

Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.

Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.

118

4.16.1.a Adding a Fill Average Data Gaps Task

Previously this task allowed blank records to be created as place holders in the database where gaps in the data may have occurred in any previous poll, so that if the data needs to be hand entered the

Average Data Editor will be able to bring up the blank cells. This process is now handled virtually in memory instead of with records that are stored in the database. This saves space in the database, improved data load times, and removes the need to have a scheduled task to fill the gaps. The way it now functions is if any of the blank intervals are edited the application will create the needed entry in the database at that time. So this task no longer needs to be scheduled to run automatically in the scheduler.

4.16.1.b Adding a Logger Poll Task

Logger Poll Options section

Logger - Click the down arrow and select the logger from the drop down list that you want to retrieve the data from.

Logger Command - Click the down arrow and select the type of data from the drop down list that you want to retrieve from the logger.

Average Interval - Click the down arrow and select the interval type for the data from the drop down list that you want to retrieve from the logger.

119

4.16.1.c Adding a AIRNow FTP Transfer Task

AIRNow FTP Transfer Task Options section

FTP Configuration – Click the down arrow and select the transfer program from the drop down list that you previously created under the AIRNow/FTP Setup screen.

System – Click the down arrow and select the system from the drop down list that this report is for.

Transfer Format – Click the down arrow and select from the list which AIRNow report format is going to transferred; OBS for the original format, or AQCSV for the new format. This new selection eliminates the need to set up the new format as a scheduled report to be transferred

Data Availability Options

Wait until at least __ % of the data is available – Use the radio buttons or type in the field the percentage that you want the data to be completed before it creates the file.

Setting this field causes a check to be done of defined sites and parameters to see if they are available in the database and if not it will retry before trying to transfer the report. If the check fails it will not transfer the report, so to make sure a report gets transferred every hour it is best to set two transfers in a group task, explained further into the chapter, one with the percent blank and one with the percent filled in.

4.16.1.d Adding a Scheduled Report Task

Report Task Options section

Report – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list of reports which report you want this task to automatically run.

Configure Report Query button – Clicking this button will bring up a Query Designer screen.

Click Ok at the bottom of the screen to save the settings. If no settings are selected on this screen, then the default selection for the report will be all of the sites and parameters that are enabled and qualify for the type of report selected.

120

Date Range Selection section

Current Day, Month, Quarter, Week, and Year – Does not use the date and look back fields and simply uses the current date range that is selected.

Fixed Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the Start and End Date fields the date range this report is include data.

Last Month, Quarter, and Week, and Yesterday – Does not use the date and look back fields and simply uses the previous date range that is selected from the current date.

Lookback Days, Hours, and Minutes – Use the radio buttons or type in the Look

Back Intervals field the number of days you want to the report to go back to and get data from.

Yesterday – Automatically selects the day before the current day.

Parameter Selection section – Select the site and parameter that is to be included on this report.

Average Interval section – Select the type of data that is to be included on this report.

Query String section – Shows the string being used to create this report. If you use the

Clear Selection button it will remove the string and it cannot be brought back without being manually typed in or the task deleted and recreated.

Query Option Switches section - Depending on the report will depend on if this field will be accessible. Some of the reports have extra check boxes to allow more information to be turned in the report, like it does in some of the manual reports.

121

Output Options section

Printer Options tab

Enable Printing – Check the box to enable printing to a printer that the AirVision Server pc sees as one of its printers. Printers seen only by an AirVision Client pc cannot be used to print to as the Client is not the software controlling the printing.

Printer Path – If you have enabled printing to a printer, enter in the path to the printer you want the report to automatically print to. This is the UNC printer path (Uniform or

Universal Naming Convention). The printer does have to be connected to the PC where

AirVision Server is installed, either directly connected, or connected through the network. If the report is not setup to be printed to a printer, it will need to be setup to enable the notification so that the report can be setup to be sent out by email, or sent out by ftp, or written to the hard drive. Otherwise the report will not be generated and it will give an error in the Log Viewer that the report has not been given a destination.

Notification Options tab

Enable Notifications – Check the box to enable if you want this report to show in the

Notification Subscriptions editor.

Notification Context Description: - Enter in the name of the report the way you want it to show in the Notification Subscription editor. The default name is New scheduled report. If you setup more than one report and they all have been left with the default name, there will be no way to distinguish which report is which in the Notification

Configuration screen, so naming them uniquely is recommended.

122

File Output Options tab

Output File Type – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the file format type the report is to be exported to.

File Name Construction section

File Output Base Name – Enter in the name that is to be assigned to the file when it is saved.

File Extension – This field will automatically be filled in when the Output File

Type is selected.

Append Date to File Name section

Append Date to Name – Click to check the box if the date is needed to be appended to the file name.

Date Format – Enter in the format of the date that is to be appended to the file name. The default is yyyyMMddHHmm for a four digit year, two digit month, two digit day, two digit hour, and two digit minute.

Save File Options section

Save Reports to File Enabled – Click to check the box if the report is to be saved to a file.

File Output Path – Click the Browse at the end of the field to bring up a Browse for Folder and select the path to the destination folder to where the file is to be save to.

Upload File Via FTP Options section

FTP Upload Enabled – If the report is to be file transferred, click to check the box to enable the transfer.

FTP Transfer Program – Click the down arrow and select the transfer program that was previously created under the AIRNow/FTP Setup as to the location the report is to be transferred to.

123

4.16.1.e Adding an Alarm Processing Task

Alarm Processing Options section

Alarm Rule to Process - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the alarm rule that was previously created in the Email Alarm Program Editor.

4.16.1.f Adding a Journal Message Purge Task

Agilaire advises to set the purge of the journal at anything older than two weeks, as the log usually is not beneficial to keep it any longer than two weeks.

Purge Options section

Archive Type

– Click the down arrow and select the format you want to archive the data in.

Purge Data Older Than:

-

Use the radio buttons or type in the number and time frame you want the purge to go back to before purging the data. Defaults to two weeks.

Archive Data Before Purging

– Click to check this box if you want to archive the data before purging it, then fill in the Alternate Archive Folder (On Server) field with the path to the location in which you want the log to be written to.

4.16.1.g Adding a Average Data Purge Task

Purging of data has to be done for more than twenty four hours. If it is set to purge only twenty four hours the data will not purge.

124

Purge Options section

Archive Type

– This field is defaulted to Average Data and cannot be changed.

Purge Data Older Than:

-

Use the radio buttons or type in the number and time frame you want the purge to go back to before purging the data. Defaults to three years.

Archive Data Before Purging

– Click to check this box if you want to archive the data before purging it.

Alternate Archive Folder (On Server) – Enter in the path to the location of where the data files are to be archived. They will be archived in XML format. If the Archive Data box is checked and this field is left blank the files will be written to the location of C:\Users\Admin\AppData\Local

\Agilaire\AirVision\Server\Archive.

Average Data Purge Options section

Interval to Purge – Click the down arrow and select the data type from the list that is to be purged.

Retain Readings During Calibration – Check the box if data marked with a C flag for calibration should not be deleted.

Parameter Selection section – Select between All Parameters or Selected Parameters which will allow you to pick which parameter to delete the data for.

4.16.1.h Adding a Schedule Command Line Task

Command Line Task Options section

Executable Name – the name of the executable... i.e. notepad.exe

125

Command Line Arguments – whatever the executable needs for argument, i.e. what would be after the executable on the command line, for notepad it might be –f frog.txt

Success Exit Codes: (Comma Separated) – a command line executable can return a code of success or failure, typically 0 is success and non 0 indicates an error in execution but it's all dependent on who wrote the executable.

Kill Process on Timeout – Check this box if you want the process stopped if it times out.

Process Timeout Interval -The scheduler will wait up to X time for the process to finish. If "Kill

Process on Timeout" is checked, the scheduler will actually kill the process. The status of the task will be failure. If "Kill Process on Timeout" is unchecked, the scheduler will let it continue running, but it will "detach" it and move on to the next task in the group. In this case the task status will be warning. Note that if the process time out has been exceeded, then the success exit codes are ignored.

4.16.1.i Adding SQL Execution Task

SQL Execution Task Information section

SQL Command Text – Type in the command line that will execute the SQL task.

Command Timeout Seconds Override (optional) – Enter in the seconds that you want it to wait on a timeout before the command is overridden. Defaults to 600.

126

4.16.1.j Adding a New Task Group

Tasks can be defined to run as groups, either in parallel, or sequentially. Task groups can also be run as sub-tasks of other task groups, in case you need to mix parallel and sequential operation.

Task Groups allow multiple tasks to be group together in one polling process instead of multiple individual tasks. Tasks can be define to run a groups in parallel, sequentially, or as sub-tasks of other task groups to allow mixing of parallel and sequential operations.

Add Sub Task button – To add a new sub task to the Task Group click this button and select the task from the drop down list.

Delete Selected Sub Task button – To remove a task from the Task Group select the task at the bottom under Sub Task and click the Delete Selected Sub Task button.

Group Options section

Execute Tasks In Parallel – Click to check this box if you want all of the sub tasks to run at the same time and the execution order to be ignored.

Sub Tasks section

Task Name – Displays the name of the task that was selected from the Add Sub Task button drop down list.

Task Enabled – Click the check the box to enable the sub task is to run under the Group Task.

Execution Order – Enter in the number to set the order that each sub task is supposed to run.

Fail Group on Error – Click to check this box if you want the whole Task Group to fail or cease to run, in the case of an error.

Task Type – Indicates the each of the sub tasks are part of one group task.

Edit Task – This is a button that if clicked will bring up another window with the same fields that are under Task Details on the main Task Scheduler screen.

127

4.16.2 Setting up the Task Scheduler Using the Wizard

To create a task using the wizard, select the Run Schedule Wizard on the Ribbon at the top. This will pop up a Task Wizard window asking you to create a new task. Follow the steps on each screen. The wizard can also be ran by selecting Task Wizard from the Utilities menu and it will pop up the wizard in a separate window.

Click Next to begin the setup through the wizard.

Select the site and logger that is to be polled. Use the Shift key to select more than one site that are in sequential order, or the Control key to select random sites.

128

Select the type of the data that is to be polled. Use the Shift key to select more than one interval that are in sequential order, or the Control key to select random intervals.

Enter in the date and time the task is to run, how often it is to run, and which Executive will be running the task.

Click Next to create the task in the scheduler.

129

After clicking finish the wizard will close and the task will now be showing in the Task Scheduler grid.

4.16.3 Executing a Scheduled Task Manually

To execute a task manually, select the task by single clicking the blue square on the left side of the task to highlight the row under the Scheduled Task Selection. Then select the Execute Scheduled Task Now

button on the Ribbon at the top. You have to be logged into the server in order for this feature to work.

If you have logged into AirVision as local user it will give a message box stating that it cannot run in local mode, but only from the server.

Once connected to the server select the Execute Scheduled Task Now button and depending on how long it takes the task to run will depend on how long you see a progress bar. If it is a short task process, such as a report, you will just see it blink on the screen; a larger task process will allow the progress bar to stay up for a few seconds to a few minutes.

To see the task take place open the Log Viewer before executing the scheduled task manually. After executing the task the status will show as the bottom entry on the Log Viewer.

4.16.4 Editing the Range Time on a Polling Task

The last poll time, or in other words, how far back the poll will ask the logger for data can be changed by selecting the task that you want to edit then select the Update Task Status button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up an Update Task Status window where you can change the date and/or time, click OK then click Save before exiting the Task Scheduler.

130

4.17 Report Logo Editor

To setup the report logo, expand Report Configurations from the Configuration Editors menu, and single click Report Logo Editor. The Report Logo Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. To add an image select the Browse for Image button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up an Open box where you can browse to a location where image files are stored. Select an image and click open for the image to appear in the Report Logo Image box. Click Save when the desired image has been chosen.

This image will now show at the top of the reports.

To remove the image so that there is no image showing at the top of the reports, select the Clear Logo

Image button on the Ribbon at the top.

131

Chapter 5: Communication

5.1 Linking to Logger

To link to the logger, single click Link to Logger from the Utilities menu. The Link To Logger tab will open on the right side of the screen with a large black area. At the top of the black area is a blank field with a drop down area and a Connect button. Click the down arrow on the blank field and select one logger from the drop down list that you want to connect to, and click the Connect button. The button will then change to disconnect.

The Server Connection field is defaulted to being selected so that the Telnet connection goes through the database to connect to the site. This field will remain grayed out for sites using modem or direct connections, and is only available to be selected or deselected for sites using TCP connections. If deselected the Telnet connection will go straight to the site without going through the database. Which means that if the user is using AirVision Client on their PC which is separate from the AirVision Server

PC, then the connection is being made through Telnet on the Client PC only and not from the Server.

When you are finished working in the logger, always select O to log out of the logger before disconnecting or you could get locked out of the logger for ten minutes or until the logger resets the connection. Once you have logged out click the Disconnect button to end the connection to the logger.

The logger itself does not support an upload command but it has always had the ability to dump to a file.

The software now has the capability to parse that file and import it into the software. However, the GSI and Modbus settings cannot be uploaded because of the correlation of the drivers are not known to the logger in the same way AirVision knows them. These settings will have to be configured manually in the software.

To upload the configuration from the logger, link to the logger and log in. From the menus select Status and Dump Setup, then select the Start Recording button on the Ribbon at the top. On the link to logger

132

screen select Dump All to Curr Port and press enter to start the dump process. When the dump has finished, select the Stop Recording button on the ribbon at the top and it will bring up a save screen.

Give the file a name and select a location for it to be saved to. Press the escape key until you have returned to the Home Menu, and select O to log out. Click the Disconnect button on the link screen to completely disconnect from the logger.

To import the information open the Data Source Details screen, expand the site and select the logger, which has to already exist before the file can be parsed. Then select the Parse Config File button on the

Ribbon at the top. Browse to where the file is stored and double click on the file, or select the file and click Open. The parsing will then begin and give a status complete when it is finished.

133

5.2 Logger Download

To download settings from the software to the logger, single click Logger Download from the Utilities menu. The Logger Download tab will open on the right side of the screen.

Site and Source Name – Select the site and source that you want to poll from by clicking the blue square to the left side of the name to highlight the row. To download to multiple sites use the shift or control keys while selecting the sites in site and source name list. If using modems you can queue up what you want to poll, but if using TCP it will connect and collect the data quicker than the task can be queued.

Download Type – Select from the list what you want to download to the logger. To select all types to be downloaded you can check each of the boxes manually or you can select the Select All Download Types

button on the Ribbon at the top. Selecting the button again will deselect all download types.

Cold Start - Selecting cold start wipes out everything that is currently stored in the logger, the logger ID included unless set in the EEPROM of the logger. If cold start is selected a disclaimer will come up warning the user of the potential of wiping out the logger’s ID. If you do not want to cold start the logger, simple click the enable box again to remove the check and deselect the option.

NOTE: If you are unsure if the logger ID is set in the EEPROM, link to the logger and check the first and second screens of the Configure System Parameters menu. Control U will take you to the second screen of the System Parameters configuration.

Time Sync –Downloads the time from the computer clock running Server to the logger for the selected site.

Calibrations –Downloads all calibrations that have been configured and enabled in the Data

Source Details screen for the selected site.

Digital I/O labels –Downloads the labels that have been entered in the Data Source Details screen for the digital input and output lines for the selected site.

Digital Events –Downloads the timed event or triggered event configured and enabled in the

Data Source Details screen for the selected site.

Digital Out –Downloads the digital output line configuration for the timed or triggered event for the selected site.

Warm Start – Reboots the logger without removing any of the configuration or data.

134

Channels –If this box is checked it will allow you to pick specific channels that you want to download to the site selected. If the All box is checked it will download all channels that have been configured and enabled in the Data Source Details screen for the selected site.

Average Alarms –Downloads all alarms configured and enabled in the Data Source Details screen for the selected site.

Math Constants –Downloads all math constants that have been configured in the Data Source

Details screen, which are mainly used in conjunction with math pack channels, but can be used for other scenarios.

Modbus Master File – Downloads the Modbus configuration to loggers that have Modbus enabled.

Details – Allows specific channels to be selected to be download to the site if the Channels box is checked. This area will be grayed out if the channels All box is checked.

To select everything to be downloaded you can check all of the individual boxes or you can use the

Select All Download Types button on the Ribbon at the top.

To downloaded the selected types to the logger select the Start Download button on the Ribbon at the top.

To abort the download before it has finished sending the configuration select the Cancel button on the

Ribbon at the top.

The Show Log Viewer and Scroll With Messages buttons are selected by default so the log will appear at the bottom of the screen to shoe the results of the download. If you do not want to view the log you can deselect the buttons on the Ribbon at the top.

To clear the results sent back from the logger from the screen select the Clear Results button on the

Ribbon at the top.

The results sent back from the logger will be displayed in detailed columns below the query.

Time Initiated – The time the download was started.

Logger – Indicates which logger is being configured.

Download Type – Indicates what was sent to the logger.

Item Information – This shows the command string being sent and received.

Download Status - Shows the response sent back from the logger and if it was successful.

Download String – Shows the string being sent to the logger.

135

136

5.3 Manual Poll

To run a manual poll, single click Manual Poll from the Utilities menu. The Manual Poll tab will open on the right side of the screen.

Site and Source Name – Select the site and source that you want to poll from by clicking the blue square to the left side of the name to highlight the row. Only one site and source can be selected at a time. If using modems you can queue up what you want to poll, but if using TCP it will connect and collect the data quicker than the task can be queued.

Data Type – Select the type of data you want to retrieve. To select more than one data type hold down the Control key while clicking on the data types needing to be polled.

Date Range – Enter in start and end date range of the data that is stored in the logger that you want to retrieve. The default is the current days date and time when you open the manual poll screen.

Average Interval – Only one average interval can be selected per poll.

To manual poll the selected types from the logger select the Start Manual Poll button on the Ribbon at the top.

To abort the manual poll before it has finished retrieving the data select the Cancel button on the

Ribbon at the top.

The Show Log Viewer and Scroll With Messages buttons are selected by default so the log will appear at the bottom of the screen to shoe the results of the download. If you do not want to view the log you can deselect the buttons on the Ribbon at the top.

To clear the results sent back from the logger from the screen select the Clear Results button on the

Ribbon at the top.

Time Initiated – The time the poll started to contact the logger.

Device – The logger or instrument the poll is connected to.

Type – The type of data the poll is asking for.

Item Information – This shows the command string being sent and received.

Status - Shows the result sent back from the logger, if it was good, successful, or failed with errors.

137

138

5.4 Task Status

To open the task statuses, single click Task Status from the Status Displays menu. The Task Status tab will open on the right side of the screen. The Task Status gives the status of any task that is scheduled to run in the Task Scheduler such as polling, printing reports, emailing and ftp transfers, etc.

Refresh Options section

Refresh Status Automatically – Click to check the box if you want the refresh of the statuses to run automatically.

Refresh Interval: ____Seconds - Used the radio buttons to set how many seconds should pass before the automatic refresh runs. Default is 30 seconds.

Name – Gives the name of the Executive and the name of the tasks setup for that Executive to handle and the date and time the task started to run.

Type – Shows if the name is an executive or a task and the type of task.

Status – Shows if the task has completed successfully, with warnings, had an error, if the task is disabled, or never executed. Status colors indicate:

Green = Task completed successfully.

Yellow = Task completed with warnings.

Orange = Task is currently running.

Red = Critical error was unhandled by the task processor.

Gray = Task is Disabled.

Cream/Tan = Task has Never Executed.

Last Start Time – Shows the date and time when the task last started.

Last End Time – Shows the date and time when the task last ended.

Last Successful Run – Shows the date and time when the task last ran successfully.

Latest Data Time – Shows the date and time that the task has manually been set to for the poll to go back to that time frame and ask for data. This time frame can be edited by selecting the Update Task

Status button on the Ribbon above the Main Navigation menu.

139

Task Status Message – Shows what an error is or what may have caused the error on a task, or why a task is disabled.

To view the Journal Message Log for one specific task, without having to run the complete log from the

Reports menu, select the View Log Messages button on the Ribbon above the Main Navigation menu.

This will bring up another window that looks similar to the Log Viewer, that will display the current days activity.

140

5.4.1 Executing a Scheduled Task Manually

To execute a task manually select the task by single clicking in the tan square on the left side of the task to highlight the row. Then select the Execute Scheduled Task Now button on the Ribbon at the top.

You have to be logged into the server in order for this feature to work. If you have logged into AirVision as local user it will give a message box stating that it cannot run in local mode, but only from the server.

To see the task take place open the Log Viewer from the Status Displays menu, before executing the scheduled task manually. After executing the task the status will show as the bottom entry on the Log

Viewer.

141

Chapter 6: Data Editors

6.1 Query Usage for All Data Editors

Date Ranges – There are several ways to enter in the start and end date range for any of the data editors.

1. You can click in each division of the date or the time and use the delete key or the backspace key to remove the existing number and type in a new number.

2. You can highlight the number and type over it, replacing it with a new number.

3. You can click on the number and use the up and down arrows to scroll through the numbers.

4. You can click the larger down arrow at the end of the date and time and it will bring up a calendar where you can scroll from month to month and click on the date you want to select.

5. You can click the star button and it will bring up another box where you can select from various ranges to help shorten the time spent in put in the date range you want to see.

Site and Parameter Selection – Select one or more sites and parameters to be shown on the report. To select multiple row; click and drag down the left side of the columns in the blue squares and each row will highlight as it is selected. You can also click each row while holding down the Control key, or you can click the first row you want to start with then hold down the Shift key and click the last row you want to end with. When right clicking on the selection it will bring up two options of Select All and Clear

All Selections. If multiple fields are selected and the Clear All Selections option is chosen it may not remove the highlight from the fields but it has deselected the previous choices. If you right click and choose Select All it will highlight all options.

Average Interval selection – You can only select one interval per generated report. Select the interval by single clicking the blue square on the left side of the interval for the data type you want to run the report for. Each interval has its description listed to the right of the interval. The default highlight is on the hourly interval, but may not necessarily be selected. To make sure the interval is selected by single clicking on the blue square on the left side of the interval so that the interval and description are selected with dots around the outer edge of the highlight.

Filters and Sorting are explained in Chapter 3 General Information.

If there is no data to display for the request you made it will give back information below the query in the Report Errors section giving the time you tried to run the report, and the error level of what type of error it is giving back to you, and what the error message is.

Keep in mind the more data that you try to retrieve in any of the reports, the longer it will take for the query to gather the data from the database to display it. If you realize that you selected too large of a range of data or the wrong date or time frame, just simply close the Data Editor tab and reopen the Data

Editor and enter in the correct query selection.

142

143

6.2 Average Data Editor

To open the data editor, single click Average Data Editor from the Data Editors menu. The Average Data

Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, to open the editor select the Retrieve Data button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the data below the query.

An example of the editor options are shown below.

Selection Criteria Section

Date Range – Enter in the Start and End Dates for the range of data you want to retrieve. The date and time will default to the current date and time as of when you open the editor.

Average Interval – Select the interval type and its description for the type of data you want to retrieve. Only one interval can be selected at a time.

Parameter Selection – Select the site and parameter name you want the data retrieved for. You can select more than one site and parameter by clicking and dragging, or by clicking while holding down the shift key. The AQS parameter column simply indicates if the parameter has been setup for the AQS report.

To retrieve the data click the Retrieve Data button on the left side of the buttons on the button bar above the Main Navigation menu. The results will be brought up at the bottom under the query section. To highlight the column you can click and drag down the column or you can click each row while holding down the shift key.

Site – Shows the site(s) that data has been retrieved for.

Parameter – Shows the parameter(s) the data has been retrieved for.

Average interval – Shows the interval type of data that was retrieved.

Date – Shows the date the data was collected on by the logger.

Value – The data value that was retrieved from the database. To change the value in a cell, double click the cell, or right click the cell to get a pop-up menu. If the data is bold it means that it has been edited and doesn’t match the raw data. If the data is in italics it means it has an annotation. If you hover the mouse over the data value it will show the annotation. This column is only shown with the Linear Data display.

Raw Value - This column is only shown with the Linear Data display, and cannot be edited in any manner.

AQS Null Code - This column is automatically shown with the Linear Data display, and shows any null code that is attached to the data. Click in the cell in this column that you want to add a null code and it will bring up a Set AQS Null Code box where you can click the down arrow and select a null code from the drop down list. Click OK to apply the code. The Set AQS Null Code box can also be accessed by right

144

clicking on the cell as well. To see the null code on the Cross-Tab Data or the Matrix Data displays, while having one of these displays open click the Display NullCode button on the Ribbon at the top.

Flags - This column is only shown with the Linear Data display, and shows any flag(s) that is attached to the data. Click in the cell in this column that you want to add a flag and it will bring up a Set Data Flags box where you can check the box beside of the flag(s) needed. Click OK to apply the flag. The Set Data

Flags box can also be accessed by right clicking on the cell as well.

Qualifier Codes - This column is only shown with the Linear Data display. Click in the cell in this column that you want to add a qualifier code and it will bring up a Set Qualifier Code(s) box where you can check the box beside of the code(s) needed. Click OK to apply the code. The Set Qualifier Code(s) box can also be accessed by right clicking on the cell as well.

AQS Method Code - This column is only shown with the Linear Data display, and shows the method code that is attached to the data. Double click the cell to type in a method code. Click out of the cell to apply the code. The Set AQS Method Code box can also be accessed by right clicking on the cell as well.

Data Grade - This column is only shown with the Linear Data display, and used only by the ADVP. If you do not have the ADVP module this column will remain grayed out. Based on the color that has been assigned to the flag(s) that are attached to the data; data with more than one flag will be displayed as the highest priority flag color, but a cross-hatching pattern is used to show that more than one flag is present.

To export the retrieved data to Excel click the Export to Excel button on the left side of the buttons on the button bar above the Main Navigation menu. This will bring up a save box asking you to give the

Excel file a name. The default location for saving the file is My Documents, but can be change to another location while the save box is open if you choose to change the location.

There are six different ways to display the data. Each display option will add or remove columns depending on the choice you make. The default is the Linear Data display. It is also the one that gives the most columns on the display and the only one that will show the Value (which is the validated data),

Raw Value, AQS Null Code, Flags, and Qualifier Codes columns on the same display.

To edit data using the linear, Cross-Tab, and Matrix displays, click on the cell in the Value column that you want to edit to select it, then right click on the same cell. This will open a pop-up menu with several options to select from, which are described below. This pop-up menu can only be used on the Value column, as the data in the Raw Value column cannot be edited.

145

Restore From Raw – This option will remain grayed out unless the validated value has been changed. If data has been changed and you need to put it back to the state it was when polled from the logger you can select this option to copy the raw data over the validated data. Save the changes when the process is finished.

Restore to Original - If data has been changed and raw data doesn’t exist, this option will allow you to put the value back to the state it was before the change was made. Save the changes when the process is finished.

Set to Minimum Detectable Limit – The minimum detectable limit has to be set in the Site/Parameter setup screen for the parameter that you are editing for this selection to work. If the minimum detectable is set for the parameter and you want the value for the selected field to be set to the min detect, then you can select this option to change the value to the limit provided in the setup screen.

Set AQS Null Code – This option opens a Set AQS Null Code box where you can click the down arrow and it will drop down a list of null codes to select from. To select a code click it once to enter it into the AQS

Code field. Once you selection has been made click Ok and the change will be processed and entered into the cell in the AQS Null Code column.

Set Qualifier Codes – This option opens a Set Qualifiers Code(s) box where you can select the code and description that best fits the data by checking the box beside of the desired code.

146

View All Flags – This option opens a Set Data Flags box where you can manually assign a flag to the data by checking the box beside of the desired flag.

Set Annotations – This option opens a Set Annotation box where the date defaults to the current date and time. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the Author User and the Category. If the category you need is not listed you can add it by selecting the Add button and it will open an

AnotCategory box where you enter in the category name in the field at the bottom and click the Add button, it will put your entry in the Category list. To delete a category select the name in the list and click the Delete button and it will simply remove the entry without verifying this is the one you want to delete. After putting an annotation on the data it will change the font of the value to italic.

Delete Annotations – After selecting data that has an annotation attached to it, this option allows you to remove the annotation from the data. To disable the ability to delete any annotation that has been added to the data even when the data has been restored to the original data, close the Average Data

Editor. Enter the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool which is located under the

Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the Average Data Editor and the delete annotation option will be grayed out.

147

update dbo.UtilitySetting setSettingValue=0 where SettingKey=’AnnotationDeletesAreAllowed’

To re-enable the ability to delete annotations follow the same steps as listed above with this script: update dbo.UtilitySetting setSettingValue=1 where SettingKey=’AnnotationDeletesAreAllowed’

Batch Edit – This option will remain grayed out unless more than one cell is selected at a time. It will open a Batch Edit box that will give you five options to select from for editing the data. When selecting from the Navigation list which edit you want to use you will need to check the enable box on the top right of the screen to enable that feature to allow you to use it.

UpdateValues gives the linear correction formula and can also be used to batch fill in blank fields with a duplicate value. The cell for the value is the original value in the formula, and if blank is viewed by the formula as a zero. Zero multiplied by the value entered into the Multiplier field will be zero, then it is added to the Constant field, so the value put in the cells will be the value that is entered into the

Constant field of the formula.

Set AQS Method Codes allows you to attach the same method code to a large amount of data at once.

Set Annotations, Set AQS Code, Set Qualifier Codes, and Set Flags work in the same manner as mentioned above except it does it for more than on data value.

Show Children – If you want to show a child parameter you will need to select this option on the child parameter so that it will retrieve the parent parameter and its data. If you select this option on a parent parameter that is not a child parameter itself it will give this error: “The selected parameters do not have Parent Parameter IDs configured”.

Drill-Down Interval – Brings up a new Average Data Editor tab showing how the hourly data went to minute data.

Export to Excel – This creates a file that can be opened in Excel.

148

Analyze/Export Selected – If selected, a new screen will open where the data can be changed from

Average to Sum, to Min, to Max, and can be exported to a document where it can be saved to a file or printed.

Copy Selected To Clipboard – This allows the highlighted values to be copied and pasted into another form such as a Word document or Excel, etc.

Cross-Tab Data – This display gives a Date column and a column for each parameter for each site that you selected in the criteria. This display only shows the validated data. You also have the ability to right click on the data cell and get the same options on the pop- up menu as mentioned above, but you can only see the results of any changes made with those menu options by going back to the Linear Data display so the extra columns are visible. The order of the columns can be changed by dragging the column by the column heading and dropping it in the order that you want to see displayed.

Clicking the Display Null Code button on the Ribbon at the top, while in the Cross-Tab editor will show a

Null Code column beside of each value column.

149

Matrix Data – This display gives a Site, Parameter, and Interval columns. To see the data values for each day and hour click the plus sign on the left side of the site name to expand the matrix grid.

Clicking the Display Null Code button on the Ribbon at the top, while in the Matrix editor will show a

Null Code column beside of each value column.

All of the graphs have a Graph Theme field at the bottom center below the graphs that allows you to change the color scheme of the graphs, the default is Nature Colors, and the examples below are using

Northern Lights. The color scheme can be changed on one of the graphs and saved and it will follow through to the other two graphs and will also remain the color scheme for the next time you open the graphs. The graphs can be exported by selecting the Print button at the bottom of the graphs to open the print preview window, then selecting the Export button on the Ribbon at the top, select the Export

To button and choose the format time to save the graph to.

Time Series Graph – This display gives a line graph where the scale is displayed on the Y axis and the date and time is displayed on the X axis. The sites, parameters and interval are displayed over to the right side with a color chart when the Show Legend box is checked at the bottom left below the graph.

150

When multiple parameters are selected they are shown in different colors. The graph shown below is with two parameters selected shown in different colors.

When a single parameter is selected the history and statistics settings are activated. The graph shown below is with one parameter selected.

While still showing the history, the Lookback Count and Gap fields can be set and the graph will give the original data that was queried as well as the years and days that was entered in the fields. To retrieve this new setting for the graph click the Refresh button above the graph. The default for the Lookback

Count is years, but it can also be set to months or days. The default for the Lookback Gap is days, but it can also be set to hours.

To have the statistics displayed along with the original queried data select Show Statistics above the graph and fill in the Lookback Count and Gap fields, then click the Refresh button and the graph will

151

show the original data along with the minimum, maximum, average, and geometric mean of the original data on one parameter at a time.

The colored circles on the legend are also buttons that can be clicked to darken a data line on the graph so that is stands out above the others to be easier. For example, the graph below is the same as the previous graph above with the exception that the dark blue button beside of the Ozone 001h in the legend has been selected, which in turn darkened in the original data line on the graph.

This graph shows where the Ozone: Minimum in the legend has been selected.

152

This graph shows where the Ozone: Maximum in the legend has been selected.

This graph shows where the Ozone: Average in the legend has been selected.

This graph shows where the Ozone: Geometric Mean in the legend was selected.

Use Dynamic Scaling simply rescales the graph to show the full scale of the data that you have retrieved.

Display Raw Reading when selected shows the raw data on the graph, and when deselected shows the validated data.

The time series graph can also be retrieved in a report style by using the Average Data Graph Report under Average Reports from the Reports menu.

153

To be able to put this graph in a report, it can be ran manually by selecting the Average Data Graph

Report under Average Reports from the Reports menu. If you would like for this process to happen automatically you can schedule a Report Task and select the Average Data Graph Report from the report list in the task; and it can be emailed by configuring the Notification Options in the task.

Scatter Plot – Displays values for two variables for a set of data. The data is displayed as a collection of points, each having the value of one variable determining the position on the horizontal axis and the value of the other variable determining the position on the vertical axis. This display gives a plotted graph where the Y axis is a selected site and parameter and the X axis is another selected site and parameter. Only two parameters can be displayed on this graph at a time, no more and no less. To change the axis parameters click the down arrow on the right side of each parameter at the top of the graph and select the other parameter in the list, so the Y parameter can be changed to the X parameter, and the X parameter can be changed to the Y parameter. Click the Refresh button once the new settings have been entered to change the graph.

This graph shows the original parameter settings and includes invalid data points shown on the graph with the red dots.

This graph shows the original parameter settings but without the invalid data points.

154

This graph shows the parameter axes switched and includes the invalid data points.

This graph shows the parameter axes switched but without the invalid data points.

This graph shows both the Y and X axis using the same parameter to make it more defined and includes the invalid data points.

155

This graph shows both the Y and X axis using the same parameter but without the invalid data points.

Histogram – A bar graph of a frequency distribution in which the widths of the bars are proportional to the classes into which the variable has been divided and the heights of the bars are proportional to the class frequencies. This display gives a line graph where the parameter names are not shown. This graph shows the default scale set for the parameter in the Site/Parameter screen.

This graph shows the Override box checked which allows you to change the Interval Size and to increase or decrease the size of the graph scale. Click the Refresh button once the new settings have been entered to resize the graph.

156

6.2.1 Annotate Data

This editor was designed to be used with the Security and Group Permissions system to give limited access to the data only for the purpose of entering annotation notes. Any annotation added to data in the Average Data Editor will show in the Annotate Data and vice versa. To add an annotation to the data right click on a data value in the column on the right and select the Annotate Selected menu, enter in the memo and save it. Once the annotation has been attached to the data, the data point on the chart will be larger than all other data points to indicate a memo is attached to it. Move the mouse over top of the data point and the memo will pop up, as seen in the example below.

157

6.3 Batch Reading Updater

The Batch Reading Editor is a blind edit that mimics the function of the Batch Edit in the Average Data

Editor, but without retrieving data to more quickly edit large sets of data, without seeing the data or the results of the edit.

To open the batch updater, single click Batch Reading Updater from the Data Editors menu. The Batch

Reading Updater tab will open on the right side of the screen. Make the query selection for which the edits will be applied, then setup the required information under the Action to Take section.

Action Selection: - When the Batch Reading Updater screen is opened this field defaults to Set Value.

Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the action that is to be taken on the select data query.

Set Value – To perform the linear equation on existing data the original Value represents the value located in the data cell which is then multiplied by the Multiplier field, then added to the Constant field.

The calculation will be applied to the query selected once the Apply Action button is selected on the

Ribbon at the top.

To fill in a batch of blank data cells with the same value, the original value represents the empty cell, which would view as zero. Multiply the zero by the Multiplier field, then add the Constant field, check the Create Missing Readings box at the bottom of the screen and the result is what will get written into the fields of the selected query once the Apply Action button is selected.

To apply a progressive slope or intercept to the data check the box to do so.

158

Set Annotation – Applies the annotation to the query selection once the Apply Action button has been selected.

Set AQS Null Code – Applies the null code to the query selection once the Apply Action button have been selected.

Set AQS Qualifier Codes – Allows qualifier codes to be set or cleared for the query selection once the

Apply Action button have been selected.

159

Set Method Code – Applies the method code to the query selection once the Apply Action button has been selected.

Set Reading Flags - Allows flags to be attached or removed for the query selection once the Apply Action button has been selected.

Set Reading Lock – Allows the ability to lock or unlock data against edits for the query selection once the

Apply Action button has been selected.

160

Set to MDL – Set the data to be set to the minimum detectable limit for the query selection once the

Apply button has been selected.

161

6.4 Purging Data

6.4.1 Purge Average Data

To delete or archive average data, expand Archive/Purge Data from the Utilities menu and single click

Purge Average Data. The Purge Average Data tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to archive or delete data, select the Process Data Archive/Purge button on the

Ribbon at the top. Data that is being purged has to be more than 24 hours. Selecting 24 hours or less will not purge. An example of the editor options are shown below.

Purge / Archive Date Criteria section

Data Older Than –Use the radio buttons and down arrow to select the time frame of data that you want to archive or delete that is only older than the time range that you selected. Defaults to 3 years.

Specific Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time frame of data that you want to archive or delete. In order for the purging and archiving to function more than one day has to be selected so that the hours are more than 24 hours that is being purged or archived, and the last day will not be included in the files that are archived. For example, if you select to archive the first five days in a month, the date range entered in would need to start with the first and end with the fifth of that month. The days archived would be the first through the fourth, and the fifth would be left out, and a file for each of the four days would be created. If only one day is selected nothing will happen.

Action to Take section

Archive Data – Creates a zipped file in the destination location provided with the name

ReadingArchiveConfig, along with the type of data that was chosen from the query, such as

001H. for hourly dat, then the year, month, and day.xml.zip. Within the zipped file will be an

XML file with the same name. For example selecting to archive hourly data for a couple days starting with February 2 nd

will name the zipped file as such:

ReadingAverageData.001H.20060202.xml.zip, and will name the XML file as such:

ReadingAverageData.001H.20060202.xml. This will allow you to import the xml file back into the database in the case the data is purged out of the database.

Archive and Purge Data – Creates the file for the archive the same as the example explained for the Archive Data. The Purge will delete the data from the database except for the ending date selected, the same as it does with archiving the data.

Purge Data –Deletes the data from the database except for the ending date selected, the same as it does with archiving the data.

Archive File Location section - Choose from the options of Server or Local, and click the Browse button to enter in the location of where the archive is to be written to. This option works in conjunction with the Archive Data and Archive and Purge Data options only.

162

Average Data Selection section

Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the data type from the drop down list of the data that you want to archive or delete.

Retain Readings During Calibrations – Check this box if data marked with a C flag for calibration should not be deleted for the time frame selected.

Parameter Selection section

All Parameters – All sites and all of their parameters will be selected by the list being grayed out so that you cannot select or deselect from the list.

Selected Parameters – The list will come into focus and you can pick and choose the sites and parameters that you want to delete or archive data for.

Purging average data can also be ran automatically in the Task Scheduler. Refer to Chapter 4.16.1.g for instructions on how to set up the automatic task.

6.4.2 Average Data Archive Loader

To restore the data to the database, expand Table Import/Export from the Utilities menu and single click

Average Data Archive Loader. The Average Data Archive Loader tab will open on the right side of the screen. Select the location of where the archive file(s) were stored, and select the date range and type of data to restore. Select the Load Archive button on the Ribbon at the top to reload the data to the database

163

6.4.3 Purge Calibration Data

To delete or archive calibration data, expand Archive/Purge Data from the Utilities menu and single click

Purge Calibration Data. The Purge Calibration Data tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to archive or delete data, select the Process Data Archive/Purge button on the Ribbon at the top. Data that is being purged has to be more than 24 hours. Selecting 24 hours or less will not purge. An example of the editor options are shown below.

Purge / Archive Date Criteria section

Data Older Than –Use the radio buttons and down arrow to select the time frame of data that you want to archive or delete that is only older than the time range that you selected. Defaults to 3 years.

Specific Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time frame of data that you want to archive or delete. In order for the purging and archiving to function more than one day has to be selected so that the hours are more than 24 hours that is being purged or archived, and the last day will not be included in the files that are archived. For example, if you select to archive the first five days in a month, the date range entered in would need to start with the first and end with the fifth of that month. The days archived would be the first through the fourth, and the fifth would be left out, and a file for each of the four days would be created. If only one day is selected nothing will happen.

Action to Take section

Archive Data – Creates a zipped file in the destination location provided with the name

ReadingArchiveConfig. along with the type of data that was chosen from the query, such as

001H. for hourly dat, then the year, month, and day.xml.zip. Within the zipped file will be an

XML file with the same name. For example selecting to archive hourly data for a couple days starting with February 2 nd

will name the zipped file as such:

164

ReadingCalibrationData.001H.20060202.xml.zip, and will name the XML file as such:

ReadingCalibrationData.001H.20060202.xml. This will allow you to import the xml file back into the database in the case the data is purged out of the database.

Archive and Purge Data – Creates the file for the archive the same as the example explained for the Archive Data. The Purge will delete the data from the database except for the ending date selected, the same as it does with archiving the data.

Purge Data –Deletes the data from the database except for the ending date selected, the same as it does with archiving the data.

Archive File Location section - Choose from the options of Server or Local, and click the Browse button to enter in the location of where the archive is to be written to. This option works in conjunction with the Archive Data and Archive and Purge Data options only.

Calibration Data Selection section

Parameter Selection section

All Parameters – All sites and all of their parameters will be selected by the list being grayed out so that you cannot select or deselect from the list.

Selected Parameters – The list will come into focus and you can pick and choose the sites and parameters that you want to delete or archive data for.

165

6.5 Sample Data Editor

The purpose of the Sample Data Editor is to edit non-continuous/24 hour data. To open the data editor, single click Sample Data Editor from the Data Editors menu. The Sample Data Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. If the data does not exist and you need to manually enter the data by selecting the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. After the needed fields are filled in on the right side of the screen and the information saved it will populate the list on the left side of the screen.

To bring up previously entered data, make the query selection and select the Retrieve Data button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the data below the query. An example of the editor is shown below.

To delete a data entry, after retrieving the data, single click the blue square on the left side to highlight the row. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the data is immediately remove from the list.

Site – Shows the site(s) that data has been retrieved for.

Parameter – Shows the parameter(s) the data has been retrieved for.

Units - Shows the units for the parameter(s) retrieved.

Sample Time – This is automatically filled in by the query when the date range of the data was selected.

Value – The data value that was retrieved from the database. To change the value in a cell, double click the cell, or right click the cell to get a pop-up menu. If the data is bold it means that it has been edited and doesn’t match the raw data. If the data is in italics it means it has an annotation. If you hover the mouse over the data value it will show the annotation. This column is only shown with the Linear Data display.

Sample ID – Double click in the field to enter in a user defined code to identify the sample if a code is needed.

Null Code – Click in the null code field beside of the value that the null code is to be applied to and it will bring up a Set AQS Null Code box where you can click the down arrow and select a null code from the drop down list. Click OK to apply the code to the data if it is to be replaced with a null code on the AQS report. The Set AQS Null Code box can also be accessed by right clicking on the cell as well.

Qualifier Codes – Click in the field and it will bring up a Set Qualifier Code(s) box where you can click in the check boxes to select the code(s) to apply to the data record being entered. Click OK to apply the code to the data. The Set Qualifier Code(s) box can also be accessed by right clicking on the cell as well.

Frequency Code – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list how often the sample is taken.

Duration Code – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the time duration of the sample taken.

166

Blank Type – Click the down arrow and select from the pop up list which blank filter type applies; FIELD,

LAB, or TRIP.

Method Code – Click in the field to enter in the method code for this parameter that is to be reported on the AQS report. The Set AQS Method Code box can also be accessed by right clicking on the cell as well.

Creditable – Check this box if this parameter is a good sample that can be used. If this check box is dark blue this field is set to Null, if it is checked it is set to Yes, if it is blank it is set to No.

Scheduled – Check this box if this parameter is to be a scheduled sample. If this check box is dark blue this field is set to Null, if it is checked it is set to Yes, if it is blank it is set to No.

Exclude From Reporting – Check this box if this parameter is not to be reported.

The Sample Details tab at the bottom of the screen shows the same fields and information as it does in the columns in the middle area of the screen.

All of the fields listed below can be found under the Extended Details tab at the bottom of the screen .

End Time – Enter in the time the sample ended.

Analysis Time – Enter in the time the sample was analyzed, weighed, or counted.

Retrieved Time – Enter in the time the sample was retrieved from the site.

Canister Identifier – Enter in serial number or any other text or numbers that identifies the canister being used.

167

MDL – Enter in the Minimum Detectable Limit value if one is to be use, otherwise the field can be left blank.

Uncertainty Value – Enter in a floating point if one is needed.

Tare Weight - If the Sample Value calculator is used the Tare Weight will automatically be filled in.

Final Weight – If the Sample Value calculator is used the Final Weight will automatically be filled in.

Barometric Press – If the Sample Value calculator is used the Barometric Pressure will automatically be filled in.

Ambient Temp – If the Sample Value calculator is used the Ambient Temp will automatically be filled in.

Total Flow - If the Sample Value calculator is used the Total Flow will automatically be filled in.

If an annotation has been added to the data, it will be displayed under the Annotations tab at the bottom of the screen.

168

There are five different ways to display the data. Each display option will add or remove columns depending on the choice you make. The default is the Linear Data display. It is also the one that gives the most columns on the display.

Another way to edit data using the linear and Cross-Tab displays, click on the cell in the Value column that you want to edit to select it, then right click on the same cell. This will open a pop-up menu with several options to select from, which are described below. This pop-up menu can only be used on the

Value column.

Set to Minimum Detectable Limit – The minimum detectable limit has to be set in the Site/Parameter setup screen for the parameter that you are editing for this selection to work. If the minimum detectable is set for the parameter and you want the value for the selected field to be set to the min detect, then you can select this option to change the value to the limit provided in the setup screen.

Set AQS Null Code – This option opens a Set AQS Null Code box where you can click the down arrow and it will drop down a list of null codes to select from. To select a code click it once to enter it into the AQS

Code field. Once you selection has been made click Ok and the change will be processed and entered into the cell in the AQS Null Code column.

169

Set Qualifier Codes – This option opens a Set Qualifiers Code(s) box where you can select the code and description that best fits the data by checking the box beside of the desired code.

Set Annotations – This option opens a Set Annotation box where the date defaults to the current date and time. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the Author User and the Category. If the category you need is not listed you can add it by selecting the Add button and it will open an

AnotCategory box where you enter in the category name in the field at the bottom and click the Add button, it will put your entry in the Category list. To delete a category select the name in the list and click the Delete button and it will simply remove the entry without verifying this is the one you want to delete. After putting an annotation on the data it will change the font of the value to italic.

Delete Annotations – After selecting data that has an annotation attached to it, this option allows you to remove the annotation from the data. To disable the ability to delete any annotation that has been added to the data even when the data has been restored to the original data, close the Average Data

Editor. Enter the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool which is located under the

Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the Average Data Editor and the delete annotation option will be grayed out. update dbo.UtilitySetting setSettingValue=0 where SettingKey=’AnnotationDeletesAreAllowed’

170

To re-enable the ability to delete annotations follow the same steps as listed above with this script: update dbo.UtilitySetting setSettingValue=1 where SettingKey=’AnnotationDeletesAreAllowed’

Batch Edit – This option will remain grayed out unless more than one cell is selected at a time. It will open a Batch Edit box that will give you five options to select from for editing the data. When selecting from the Navigation list which edit you want to use you will need to check the enable box on the top right of the screen to enable that feature to allow you to use it.

UpdateValues gives the linear correction formula and can also be used to batch fill in blank fields with a duplicate value. The cell for the value is the original value in the formula, and if blank is viewed by the formula as a zero. Zero multiplied by the value entered into the Multiplier field will be zero, then it is added to the Constant field, so the value put in the cells will be the value that is entered into the

Constant field of the formula.

Set AQS Method Codes allows you to attach the same method code to a large amount of data at once.

Set Annotations, Set AQS Code, Set Qualifier Codes, and Set Flags work in the same manner as mentioned above except it does it for more than on data value.

Show Children – If you want to show a child parameter you will need to select this option on the child parameter so that it will retrieve the parent parameter and its data. If you select this option on a parent parameter that is not a child parameter itself it will give this error: “The selected parameters do not have Parent Parameter IDs configured”.

Export to Excel – This creates a file that can be opened in Excel.

171

Analyze/Export Selected – If selected, a new screen will open where the data can be changed from

Average to Sum, to Min, to Max, and can be exported to a document where it can be saved to a file or printed.

Copy Selected To Clipboard – This allows the highlighted values to be copied and pasted into another form such as a Word document or Excel, etc.

Cross-Tab Data – This display gives a Date column and a column for each parameter for each site that you selected in the criteria. This display only shows the validated data. You also have the ability to right click on the data cell and get the same options on the pop- up menu as mentioned above, but you can only see the results of any changes made with those menu options by going back to the Linear Data display so the extra columns are visible. The order of the columns can be changed by dragging the column by the column heading and dropping it in the order that you want to see displayed.

All of the graphs have a Graph Theme field at the bottom center below the graphs that allows you to change the color scheme of the graphs, the default is Nature Colors, and the examples below are using

Northern Lights. The color scheme can be changed on one of the graphs and saved and it will follow through to the other two graphs and will also remain the color scheme for the next time you open the graphs. The graphs can be exported by selecting the Print button at the bottom of the graphs to open the print preview window, then selecting the Export button on the Ribbon at the top, select the Export

To button and choose the format time to save the graph to.

Time Series Graph – This display gives a line graph where the scale is displayed on the Y axis and the date and time is displayed on the X axis. The sites, parameters and interval are displayed over to the right side with a color chart when the Show Legend box is checked at the bottom left below the graph.

172

When multiple parameters are selected they are shown in different colors. The graph shown below is with two parameters selected shown in different colors.

Scatter Plot – Displays values for two variables for a set of data. The data is displayed as a collection of points, each having the value of one variable determining the position on the horizontal axis and the value of the other variable determining the position on the vertical axis. This display gives a plotted graph where the Y axis is a selected site and parameter and the X axis is another selected site and parameter. Only two parameters can be displayed on this graph at a time, no more and no less. To change the axis parameters click the down arrow on the right side of each parameter at the top of the graph and select the other parameter in the list, so the Y parameter can be changed to the X parameter, and the X parameter can be changed to the Y parameter. Click the Refresh button once the new settings have been entered to change the graph.

This graph shows the original parameter settings and includes invalid data points shown on the graph with the red dots.

Histogram – A bar graph of a frequency distribution in which the widths of the bars are proportional to the classes into which the variable has been divided and the heights of the bars are proportional to the class frequencies. This display gives a line graph where the parameter names are not shown. This graph shows the default scale set for the parameter in the Site/Parameter screen.

173

174

6.6 Flags Editor

To edit a flag setting, single click Flags Editor from the Configuration Editors menu. The Flags Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add a new flag, select the Add New button on the Ribbon at the top and it will clear the fields on the right side of the screen.

To delete a flag, select the Delete Flag button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you be asking if you are sure you want to delete the selected flag. Select Yes to continue deleting the flag or No to stop the deletion and retain the flag.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Flags Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick

Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

Flag – Enter in the flag that you want to add to the flag column

Description Explains the use of the flag.

Priority This field allows you to change the order of priority of the flags, which flags take precedence over the others. The default settings for the priority flags are not currently set to the priority of what the logger uses.

For quick reference the logger priority for the flags are:

<, P, D, T, F, B, C, M, O, U, A, +, -, R, H, L, h, l, J, j, V, W, X, Y, Z, f, c

Priority of status flags are:

I, ?, *, >, =, m, ^, v, E, d, 9, a, z, Q,

User Defined flags are last in priority. If you want to use a flag for a user defined that hasn’t already been used by the logger, these are your options:

K , N, S, b, e, g, i, k, n, o, q, r, s, u, w, x, y, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 0, !, @, #, $, %, &

Note: Do not remove all of the priorities from the flags. If the priority is not set, the system does not know which flag is ranked higher than other flags, and will cause problems when running reports.

Invalidates Data If the purpose of the new flag that is being entered or any existing flag is to invalidate data then click this field to put a check mark in the box.

Mapped AQS Null Code Data that is flagged as invalid is required to be replaced with a null code in the AQS report. Mapping the logger flag to a null code will automatically cause the null code to me placed in the report instead of the invalid data. Click the down arrow and select the null code from the drop down list.

Mapped AIRNow Code If the logger flag is to be considered in AIRNow, but cannot be displayed on the report as itself, it can be mapped to an AIRNow flag that is allowed to be

175

displayed on the report. Click the down arrow and select the AIRNow flag from the drop down list.

Fore Color – This is the color of the font that shows in the cells in the editors.

Back Color – This is the color of the cell background in the editors.

176

6.7 Calibration Data Editor

To open the data editor, single click Calibration Data Editor from the Data Editors menu. The Calibration

Data Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To bring up previously entered or polled data, make the query selection and select the Retrieve Data

button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the data below the query. An example of the editor is shown below.

If the data does not exist and you need to manually enter the data, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up an add Calibration Data box where you select the site and parameter from the top section and the sequence and phase for the calibration from the bottom section. Select the Start and End Date and select OK.

From the selection that is made the Site, Parameter, Sequence, Phase, Start Date and End Date will automatically be filled in on the table.

Value – Click in the field and enter in the value that was the result of the calibration that was ran.

Expected Value – This field will default to zero. If the expected value is not zero click in the field and replace the value with the correct expected value.

Exclude From Reporting – Click the check the box if the sequence is not included on the calibration report.

Tracer ID – If a tracer code is used in the logger, enter in the code that is between 0000 and 9999.

177

178

6.8 Calibration Adjust Tool

This is an add on feature that has to be enabled with a license key that is provided by Agilaire. The

Calibration Adjust Tool is also discussed in Chapter 13.2.

Before the Cal Adjust Tool can function the level of the phase has to be set in the calibration setup in the

Data Source Details screen.

Level – Applies to those who have the Calibration Adjust Tool to identify the calibration levels, such as zero, span, or precision, regardless of how they are named. This field is also used to allow the Precision phase of a cal to be identified and reported on the AQS report when the Cal

Precision Data Records box is selected on the report query. Click the down arrow and select from the dropdown list, ZERO, SPAN, PREC, 20%, 40%, 60%, or 80%. Level is also discussed in the calibration setup in Chapter 4.6.4.

To open the adjustment tool, single click Calibration Adjust Tool from the Data Editors menu. The

Calibration Adjust Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To see if a calibration needs to be adjusted, select the parameter and average interval affected by the calibration and the date range the calibration ran, then select the Analyze button on the Ribbon at the top.

The Adjust for Span button is deselected by default so the adjustment will only do a zero correction. If you want the adjustment to do a span correction, then select the Adjust for Span button on the Ribbon at the top.

If the adjustment is to do a span correction as well, the Adjust for Span button is selected. You may optionally select the Sliding Scale button to have the slope factor linearly interpolated between each calibration. For example: if the slope correction on the first calibration is 1.1 and the slope correction on the second calibration is 1.05, then the hourly data at the midpoint would have a slope correction of

1.075, with the hour closest to the first calibration being 1.1 and the hour closest to the second calibration being 1.05. This button is selected by default.

If the Apply Forward button is selected the calibration corrections are applied using the calibration results going forward in time. If Apply Forward is deselected the corrections are applied going backwards from each calibration. This button is selected by default.

179

Once the configuration of buttons has been chosen, select the Analyze button to view the data. If the data is correct select the Apply button on the Ribbon at the top to make the changes. Any data such as hourly, that is changed will be marked with the z flag to show the calibration was adjusted, and the hourly data is locked from the calibration being adjusted a second time. If the data needs to be returned to its original form, a batch edit can be performed in the Average Data Editor.

6.8.1 Task Scheduler

To run the cal adjust automatically, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Calibration Adjust Task.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task

Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the

Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.

Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.

Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you want to handle running the task.

Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The default is the current date and time that you create the task.

Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the task is to run.

180

Task Details Section

General Tab

Basic Task Information section

Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list, which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection section at the top unless given a different name by the user.

Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.

Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.

This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled

Task Selection section at the top.

Calibration Adjust Options section

Interval to Adjust – Click the down arrow and select the type of data that is to be adjusted.

Forward Adjust – If selected the calibration corrections are applied using the calibration results going forward in time. If Forward Adjust is deselected the corrections are applied going backwards from each calibration.

Span Adjust – If selected the span will be corrected in addition to the zero correction.

Sliding Adjust - If selected to have the slope factor linearly interpolated between each calibration.

Advanced Tab

Retry Options section

Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.

Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.

181

Status Logging section

Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.

Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom, and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.

Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.

Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.

182

6.9 Cal Expected Values

To open the editor, single click Cal Expected Values from the Configuration Editors menu. The Cal

Expected Values tab will open on the right side of the screen. This menu is the same as the Quick

Expected Value Editor in the Ambient software.

The editor will give the source name, sequence name, phase name and channel name, all of which cannot be edited. The expected value can be change by double clicking in the field to highlight the existing value where you can then type in the new value. Or if the value comes from a constant, click the down arrow in that field and select which constant is to be used.

After making any changes to each expected value, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the change and a prompt will appear asking if you want to download to the logger, when using an 8816 or 8832.

183

Chapter 6.10 Forecast Editor

To open the data editor, single click Forecast Editor from the Data Editors menu. The Forecast Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. If the data does not exist and you need to enter the data by selecting the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. This will put a new line entry in the area below the query.

To bring up previously entered data, make the query selection and select the Retrieve Data button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the data below the query.

To delete a data entry, after retrieving the data, single click the blue square on the left side to highlight the row. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Click Save for the deletion to take place.

The copy button on the Ribbon at the top will copy the selected record and assign tomorrow as the effective date, unless there is already a record for that date loaded in the editor, in which case it will assign the next unused date to the record.

Site – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select the site name from the drop down list.

Effective Day – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select the date from the calendar, and use the radio buttons to set the time, or the field can be highlighted and the date and time and by typed in.

Parameter – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select the parameter name from the drop down list.

Concentration – Type in the value for the concentration level.

Forecast AQI – Click the calculator button to the right of the Forecast AQI field, and it will calculate the

AQI and automatically enter it into the Forecast field.

184

Chapter 7: Logs

The logs are generated straight from SQL, so they will be time stamped according to the calendar and clock on the PC where the SQL database resides.

7.1 Log Viewer

To open the Log Viewer, single click Log Viewer from the Status Displays menu. The Log Viewer will open at the bottom of the screen. Log Viewer is a communication viewer that will run at the bottom of any screen if opened from the Status Displays menu. It will also open below the link to logger and manual poll screen when the communication link is connected.

Options section

Refresh button – Refreshes the log messages in the viewer. Depending on the volume of messages, data access delay (e.g. slow network, etc), you may not immediately see anything new. If you setup the auto-refresh that would minimize how often you would need to refresh manually.

Auto-refresh every __ (s) – Click to check the box if you want the refresh of the log to run automatically. Used the radio buttons to set how many seconds should pass before the automatic refresh runs.

Show all messages – Click to check the box to have the log to show all of the messages it has collected.

Scroll with messages – Click to check the box if you want the scrolling to automatically stay with the most recent entry.

Export to Excel button – Click this button to bring up a Save window to select a location and give a name to the Excel file that the log is being exported to.

Time – The time of communication.

Event Type – The different types are Communication, Information, Warning, Startup, Shutdown, and Exception.

Message – The request or string being sent to the logger, and the response from the logger sent back. Hover the mouse over the field and it will bring up the full message, but only for a few seconds. This can made the string hard to read. The strings are also recorded to the Journal

Message Log, and the complete string can be seen by running the log.

185

To see a more in depth look at the message you can highlight the row, then double click the highlighted row to pop up a Message Details box that gives some of the duplicate information along with fields such as who inserted the message, the computer name, and the program name, as well as a more extensive look at the message that was entered. When finished click the Ok button at the bottom right to close the window.

186

7.2 Internal Reports

Most of the internal reports are intended for the use of Agilaire Support or possibly by a Database

Administrator and really should not be used by someone unfamiliar with SQL. The slightest change made to any of the SQL tables can make drastic changes to the database, and SQL is not like other applications; it is not a forgiving program. It assumes that when a change it made that is what you want even though it may have been a mistake. It does not ask you to save your changes when you close the program, so any change that is made concerning SQL is permanent.

However, one of the reports can actually aid the user in determining if a poll has had any communication issues or not.

To open the internal reports, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu.

7.2.1 Journal Message Log

To run the journal messages, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu and single click Journal

Message Log. The Journal Message Log tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting the date and logging type, to open the report select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.

This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. This report allows you to see the strings that were sent to and received from the logger. This report records every communication transaction ran by the software, so this log can become very large very quickly. We do advise keep this log purged on a regular basis to keep the size of the log small. An example of the report is shown below.

187

7.2.2 Historical Log Viewer

To run the Historical Log, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu and single click Historical Log

Viewer. The Historical Log Viewer tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting the date and logging type, to open the report select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the log below the query in the Report Output section. This log allows you to see the communication strings as they are shown is the Log Viewer, which are also written to the Journal

Message Log. An example of the log is shown below.

188

7.2.3 Audit Change Viewer

To run the Audit Change Viewer, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu and single click Audit

Change Viewer. The Audit Change Viewer tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting the date and logging type, to open the report select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the log below the query in the Report Output section. This log allows you to see changes made by the user(s). An example of the log is shown below.

189

The other internal reports are really for the use of Agilaire for troubleshooting purposes, such as the Diagnostic Report, DB Modification Report, and Table Size

Information.

7.2.4 Software Version Report

To run the Software Version Report, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu and single click

Software Version Report. The Software Version Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. It will automatically open the report for the current day. No date entries are required. This report allows you to see the versions of the database and when it was upgraded. An example of the report is shown below.

190

7.2.5 Exception Journal

To run the Exception Journal, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu and single click Exception

Journal. The Exception Journal tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting the date and the logging type, to open the report select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. This is more of a tool used for troubleshooting by Agilaire. An example of the report is shown below.

191

7.3 Purge Journal Messages

To open the Purge Journal Messages, expand Archive/Purge Data from the Utilities menu and single click

Purge Journal Messages. The Purge Journal Messages tab will open on the right side of the screen. The

Purge Journal Messages purges the messages collected in the message logs in the Internal Reports under Reports.

To purge or archive journal messages select Data Older Than or select and enter in a Specific Date

Range. Choose to archive the data, purge the data, or both. Then select if the process is to take place on the server or the local pc and browse to the location. When finished setting up the query select the

Process Data Archive/Purge button on the Ribbon at the top.

Purge / Archive Date Criteria section

Data Older Than –Use the radio buttons and down arrow to select the time frame of data that you want to archive or delete that is only older than the time range that you selected. The default setting is 2 weeks.

Specific Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time frame of data that you want to archive or delete. The default is the current date with a twenty four hour time setting.

Action to Take section

Archive Data – Dumps the message records out to files for the date range that is selected in the query. Once the records are dumped to files you will no longer be able to query on those messages within AirVision unless the records are imported back into the database.

Archive and Purge Data – Dumps message records out to files and delete the messages from the database for the date range that is selected in the query.

Purge Data – Deletes the messages from the database for the date range that is selected in the query.

Archive File Location section – Choose from the options of Server or Local, and click the Browse button to enter in the location of where the archive is to be written to. This option works in conjunction with the Archive Data and Archive and Purge Data options only.

192

To purge the Journal Messages Log automatically refer to Chapter 4.16.1.f Adding a Journal Message

Purge Task.

193

7.4 Audit Table Enable Tool

The purpose of the Audit Table Enabler is to allow the administrator to track which parts of the software are changed, as long as each user has a different user log in.

To open the Audit Table Enabler, single click Audit Table Enable Tool from the Configuration Editors menu. The Audit Table Enable Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen. An example of the tool options are shown below.

Click the down arrow in the Select All Tables In Category field to select which sections of the software are to be enabled. Each section does have to be configured individually. Once a category is selected, it will bring up the list of the software screens that fall under that category. Then to enable a screen to track change, check the AuditEnabled box and click the Apply button. It will then show executing action in the bottom section of the screen.

To disable auditing on a table, uncheck the AuditEnabled box and click the Apply button.

Click the save button on the Quick Access toolbar when finished.

194

7.5 LogBook Entry Editor

Entries put into the logbook are logged by the username, and can be grouped into certain categories for preventative maintenance, repair, data adjustment, etc.

To open the logbook, single click LogBook Entry Editor from the Data Editors menu. The LogBook Entry

Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add a new log entry, select the New Log Entry button on the Ribbon at the top. A new blank row will open in the Log Book Data section in the on the right side of the screen. Some of the fields in the Log

Book Entry Details section will fill in with the default settings, but they can be changed.

To change a setting on an entry, single click the blue square on the left side of the log entry to highlight the row in the Log Book Data section. Then make the changes at the bottom under the Log Book Entry

Details section.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the LogBook Entry Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

The LogBook Editor is similar to the Logbook in the Digi-Trend software which is used at a site.

LogBook Entry Editor Details section

Log Entry Time – Defaults to the current date and time the entry is entered in and cannot be changed. This is to show the date and time the log entry was created.

User – Defaults to the current user login cannot be changed without closing and reopening

AirVision and logging in as a different user of an existing login account.

User Entry Time – This entry time can be changed to show the date and time that the log entry applies to.

Site – Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop down list the log entry applies to.

Category – Click in the field for the list to drop down or click the down arrow on the right side of the new Category button and it will also drop down the list, and select the category that best applies to the log entry.

Category – Click in the field for the list to drop down or click the down arrow on the right side of the new Category button and it will also drop down the list, and select the category that best applies to the log entry. If the category that is needed is not listed, it can be added by selecting the Log Book Category Editor menu under List Editors. However, if the LogBook Entry Editor is open when the new category is added, the screen will have to be refreshed before it will see the new category in the list.

Entry Text – Type in the message that best applies for the log entry.

195

Addendums can now be made to existing logbook entries. However, this feature does have to be turned on. To turn on this feature, close the Logbook Entry Editor. Enter the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool which is located under the Utilities menu. Select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the Logbook Entry Editor and there will be an

Addendum button added to the Ribbon at the top. update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=1 where SettingKey=’EnableLogBookAddendum’

Once the addendum button is enabled, an addendum can be added to any existing log entry by selecting that entry in the top section of the Logbook Editor, then selecting the Addendum button on the Ribbon at the top and it will open a small Logbook Addendum window. Under the Addendum Text section add in the additional needed notes, then click OK to apply the entry. It will then show the additional entry under the original entry labeled as an addendum with the current days date, the time, and the user that entered the notes. Be sure to save after entry in the notes with the universal save on the Quick Access

Toolbar at the top.

7.5.1 Purge Log Book Entries

To open the Purge Log Book Entries, expand Archive/Purge Data from the Utilities menu and single click

Purge Log Book Entries. The Purge Log Book Entries tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To purge or archive log entries select Data Older Than or select and enter in a Specific Date Range.

Choose to archive the log entries, or archive and purge the log entries. Then select if the process is to take place on the server or the local pc and browse to the location. When finished setting up the query select the Process Data Archive/Purge button on the Ribbon at the top.

Purge / Archive Date Criteria section

Data Older Than –Use the radio buttons and down arrow to select the time frame of the log entry that you want to archive or delete that is only older than the time range that you selected.

The default setting is 3 years.

196

Specific Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time frame of data that you want to archive or delete. The default is the current date with a twenty four hour time setting.

Action to Take section

Archive Data – Dumps the log entries out to files for the date range that is selected in the query.

Archive and Purge Data – Dumps the log entries out to files and delete the entries from the database for the date range that is selected in the query. Once the records are dumped to files you will no longer be able to query on those entries within AirVision

Archive File Location section – Choose from the options of Server or Local, and click the Browse button to enter in the location of where the archive is to be written to.

Site Selection section – Select one or more sites that the log entries are to be archived and purged from.

197

7.6 LogBook Report

To run the logbook report, expand Notation Reports from the Reports menu and single click LogBook

Report. The LogBook Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the date range selection, pick one or more sites, and one or more categories the log entries were assigned. To open the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown per page with any entries made in the date range selected in the query. An example of the report is shown below.

198

Chapter 8: Reports

8.1 Query usage for all reports

Date Ranges – There are several ways to enter in the start and end date range for any of the reports.

1. You can click in each division of the date or the time and use the delete key or the backspace key to remove the existing number and type in a new number.

2. You can highlight the number and type over it, replacing it with a new number.

3. You can click on the number and use the up and down arrows to scroll through the numbers.

4. You can click the larger down arrow at the end of the date and time and it will bring up a calendar where you can scroll from month to month and click on the date you want to select.

5. You can click the star button and it will bring up another box where you can select from various ranges to help shorten the time spent in put in the date range you want to see.

Site and Parameter Selection – Select one or more sites and parameters to be shown on the report. To select multiple row; click and drag down the left side of the columns in the blue squares and each row will highlight as it is selected. You can also click each row while holding down the Control key, or you can click the first row you want to start with then hold down the Shift key and click the last row you want to end with. When right clicking on the selection it will bring up two options of Select All and Clear

All Selections. If multiple fields are selected and the Clear All Selections option is chosen it may not remove the highlight from the fields but it has deselected the previous choices. If you right click and choose Select All it will highlight all options.

Average Interval selection – You can only select one interval per generated report. Select the interval by clicking the blue box on the left side of the interval for the data type you want to run the report for.

Each interval has its description listed to the right of the interval. The default highlight is on the hourly interval, but may not necessarily be selected. To make sure the interval is selected click on the blue box on the left side of the interval so that the interval and description is highlight with dots around the edge of the highlight.

Filters, Sorting and the Report Output Toolbar are explained in Chapter 3 General Information.

If there is no data to display for the request you made it will give back information below the query in the Report Errors section giving the time you tried to run the report, and the error level of what type of error it is giving back to you, and what the error message is.

Keep in mind the more data that you try to retrieve in any of the reports, the longer it will take for the query to gather the data from the database to display it. If you realize that you selected too large of a range of data or the wrong date or time frame, you will not be able to cancel the retrieving process. If you don’t want to wait for it to retrieve the data so that you can correct the range of data, you can simply open a new tab of the same report and retrieve a new query. Once the incorrect query retrieves the data you can simply close that tab.

199

8.2 Daily Summary Report

To run the daily report, expand Summary Reports from the Reports menu and single click Daily Summary

Report. The Daily Summary Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, to open the report select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown separately per each day per page with the hours in a column on the left side of the grid and the parameter names in a row across the top of each of the columns just the same as it does in the Ambient software. If you want the look of the report on the screen to appear in landscape mode, just check the box labeled Switch to

Landscape and generate the report again. A portrait layout example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

The print margins for the report default to 0.32 inches. To change the margins to .020 inches close the report. Enter the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool which is located under the

Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the report.

Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=1 where SettingKey=’DailySummaryReportMargins’

A user defined text can be added to the header of the Daily Summary report by entering the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and

200

select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the Daily Summary report and retrieve some data to show the report with the desired text displayed at the top of the report.

Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’The Users Desired Text’ where SettingKey =

‘DailySummaryNotesString’

To suppress flags on the report when the averages are valid and to only show the flags when averages are invalid enter the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the report and retrieve some data known to have flags.

Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’0’ where

SettingKey=’DailySummaryShowFlags’

To change the report back to the default to show flags with valid and invalid data enter in the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool.

Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’1’ where

SettingKey=’DailySummaryShowFlags’

The report can be set to use geometric averaging by entering the below script into the top section of the

SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the

Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the report and retrieve some data to show the averaging. update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’1’ where

SettingKey=’DailySummaryGeometricAverage’

To change the averaging back to the default enter in the below script into the top section of the SQL

Execution Tool. update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’0’ where

SettingKey=’DailySummaryGeometricAverage’

If the Show Flag Description check box is checked, it will add an extra page to the bottom of the report with all of the flags and their descriptions listed. An example is shown below.

201

If the Show Calibrations check box is checked, it will add an extra page to the bottom of the report with the calibrations for the parameters that was selected in the query. This is the equivalent of the Hourlyn-cal report in Ambient. An example is shown below.

202

8.3 Data With Flags Report

To run the data report, expand Average Reports from the Reports menu and single click Data With Flags

Report. The Data With Flags Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.

This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown separately per parameter, per each day, per page with the date and time in a column on the left, then a value column, and a flags column. This report is the same as the Data Reports in the Ambient software where you can select to run the report with all flags. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

203

8.4 Daily Parameter Report

To run the parameter report, expand Summary Reports from the Reports menu and single click Daily

Parameter Report. The Daily Parameter Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section for parameters that have been configured with a parameter template in the Site/Parameter screen. All parameters are shown per each day per page. If the Show Null Codes box is checked, the data in the cells will be replaced with null codes when it applies. This report is similar to the Annual parameter summary report in the Ambient software. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

A user defined text can be added to the header of the Daily Parameter report by entering the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the left end of the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the Daily Parameter report and retrieve some data to show the report with the desired text displayed at the top of the report.

Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’The Users Desired Text’ where SettingKey =

‘DailyParameterNotesString’

204

8.5 Monthly Report

To run the monthly report, expand Summary Reports from the Reports menu and single click Monthly

Report. The Monthly Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section.

If the data or the validation flags have been color coded in the Average Data Editor the color and flags will propagate over into the Monthly Report, but non-validation flags will not. Each site and parameter is shown separately per page per month with a summary of the average, maximum and number of readings at the end of each row, and the bottom of each column unless the Totalize in Reports checkbox or Minimum in Reports checkbox is checked on the parameter in the Site/Parameter screen. If the

Totalize in Reports box is checked it will replace the Average column with a Total column, and if

Minimum in Reports box is checked it will replace the Maximum column with a Minimum column.

This is the same as is in the Ambient software with the check box for the Total actually being on the query page for the Monthly Report and can be selected or deselected on the fly. The first example is with the Maximum and Average columns shown. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to

Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

The second example is with the Minimum and Total columns shown.

205

A user defined text can be added to the header of the Monthly report by entering the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and select the

Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool.

Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the Monthly report and retrieve some data to show the report with the desired text displayed at the top of the report.

Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’The Users Desired Text’ where SettingKey =

‘MonthlyNotesString’

The report can be set to use geometric averaging by entering the below script into the top section of the

SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the left end of the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the report and retrieve some data to show the averaging. update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’1’ where

SettingKey=’MonthlyGeometricAverage’

To change the averaging back to the default enter in the below script into the top section of the SQL

Execution Tool. update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’0’ where

SettingKey=’MonthlyGeometricAverage’

206

If the Show Null Codes box is checked, the data in the cells will be replaced with null codes when it applies. If the Flags check box is checked, it will add an extra page to the bottom of the report with all of the flags and their descriptions listed. An example is shown below.

207

8.6 8 Hour Rolling Average Report

To run the rolling average report, expand Summary Reports from the Reports menu and single click 8

Hour Rolling Average Report. The 8 Hour Rolling Average Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section for parameters that have been configured with a parameter template in the Site/Parameter screen. The report is generated off of the parameter. If a parameter has multiple sites, each site will have a row attached to the parameter. All parameters are shown per each day per page. This report is similar to the Monthly report in the Ambient software when you set the Hours in Rolling Average, except this report is on a daily basis instead of monthly. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

208

8.7 24 Hour Average Summary Report

To run the 24 average report, expand Summary Reports from the Reports menu and single click 24 Hour

Average Summary Report. The 24 Hour Average Summary Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section for parameters that have been configured with a parameter template in the Site/Parameter screen. In

order for this report to show data, a continuous daily average has to be configured in the logger and

daily data has to be polled from the logger. The report is generated off of the parameter. If a parameter has multiple sites, each site will have a column attached to the parameter. All parameters are shown for all days per page. This report is similar to the Daily Averages report under Data Reports in the Ambient software. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

209

8.8 Logger Reports

8.8.1 Alarm Journal

To run the alarm journal report, expand Logger Reports from the Reports menu and single click Alarm

Journal. The Alarm Journal tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on theRibbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown separately per page the same is it does in the Alarm Logs in the Ambient software. Examples of the reports are shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report

Task.

210

8.8.2 Central Messages

To open the central messages report, expand Logger Reports from the Reports menu and single click

Central Messages. The Central Messages tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section that shows the central operator messages entered by the operator in the logger. Each site is shown separately per page the same as it does in the Operator Messages report in the Ambient software. Examples of the reports are shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report

Task.

211

8.8.3 Line Status Report

To open the line status report, expand Logger Reports from the Reports menu and single click Line

Status Report. The Line Status Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and logger is shown separately per page the same as it does in the New Input Line Status Changes and the Historical Input

Line Status Changes in the Ambient software, although laid out slightly difference. Examples of the reports are shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a

Scheduled Report Task.

212

8.8.4 Power Failure Report

To open the power failure report, expand Logger Reports from the Reports menu and single click Power

Failure Report. The Power Failure Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section, where it will show the power failures that have taken place at the sites as long as power failures have been configured in the scheduler to be polled automatically or polled manually by the user. Each site is shown separately per page the same as the Power Failures Report in the Ambient software. Examples of the reports are shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled

Report Task.

213

8.9 Calibration Reports

8.9.1 Calibration Results

To run the calibration report, expand Calibration Reports from the Reports menu and single click

Calibration Results. The Calibration Results tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.

This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown separately per page per day which is exactly the same as the Calibration report in the Ambient software. The %

Error is calculated by the expected value subtracted from the actual value. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled

Report Task.

The report can be set to show the calibration percent error as a negative by entering the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and select the

Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool.

Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the report and retrieve some data and any negative data will be shown with a minus ( - ) symbol.

Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’1’ where

SettingKey=’ShowCalErrorPercentSigned’

To change the report back to the default enter in the below script into the top section of the SQL

Execution Tool.

Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’0’ where

SettingKey=’ShowCalErrorPercentSigned’

214

8.9.2 Calibration Export

The calibration export shows what the Calibration Results report shows but without the headers. To run the export, expand Calibration Reports from the Reports menu and single click Calibration Export. The

Calibration Export tab will open on the right side of the screen. An example graph is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

8.9.3 Multi Phase Calibration Report

To run the multi phase cal report, expand Calibration Reports from the Reports menu and single click

Multi Phase Calibration Report. The Multi Phase Calibration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter

4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

215

8.9.4 USEPA Cal Zero Drift Report

To run the cal drift report, expand Calibration Reports from the Reports menu and single click USEPA Cal

Zero Drift Report. The USEPA Cal Zero Drift Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a

Scheduled Report Task.

8.9.5 Calibration Trend Graph

To run the calibration graph, expand Calibration Trend Graph from the Reports menu and single click

Calibration Trend Graph. The Calibration Trend Graph tab will open on the right side of the screen.

After making the query selection, open the graph by selecting the Generate Report button on the

Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the graph below the query.

The data’s default display is Raw Data, but can be changed by the buttons on the Ribbon to a Historical

Graph or a Response Graph, and both graphs will display the expected value and the value in two different colors so that they are easily identified on the graph. The Y axis for the Historical and Response graph are set in the parameter setup under the Site/Parameter configuration screen. The X axis for the

Historical graph displays the date you selected in the query in the middle of the graph with the previous day and next day on each side of that date. The Response graph does the same with exception of giving each minute of a few minutes previous to, and a few minutes after the data points are shown in the middle. Minute data does have to exist in the database during the same time as when the calibration ran in order for it to be able to generate this graph. Highlighting data on the graphs works the same as it does in the Average Data Editor explained in Chapter 6. This graph is similar to the Calibration graph in the Ambient software. An example of each graph is shown below.

216

Raw Data Display

Historical Graph Display

Response Graph Display

217

8.9.6 Calibration Graph Report

To run the calibration graph report, expand Calibration Reports from the Reports menu and single click

Calibration Graph Report. The Calibration Graph Report tab will open on the right side of the screen.

After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the

Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the graph below the query.

8.9.7 Calibration X Bar R Viewer

The X-Bar-R chart is similar to the calibration trend, but it focuses on a single phase in more detail. When looking at the Cal Trend graph, it shows both zero and span and minor changes of small scale are difficult to see. The X-Bar-R chart allows you to look at either zero or span in more detail by selecting one in the Calibration Level field in the query. It is equivalent to zooming in.

The top chart shows the results verses the expected, like the regular trend graph does. The bottom chart shows the change day to day (the delta) as the Y-axis value.

To run the X bar graph

218

single click the Calibration X Bar R Viewer from the Reports menu and it will open the Calibration X Bar R

Viewer tab on the right side of the screen. An example graph is shown below.

219

8.10 AIRNow Report

In order for the AIRNow report to generate data it requires that the sites that are to be included on the report have all of the EPA codes and mnemonic names configured, and the parameters that are to be included on the report have all of the EPA codes configured, AIRNow enabled under the Site/Parameter screen, and associated with a parameter template that has the mnemonic name configured under the

Parameter Template screen. It also requires the System have the agency code and the country code configured under the Site/Parameter screen. To run the AIRNow report, expand AIRNow Reports from the Reports menu and single click AIRNow Report. The AIRNow Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section which is exactly the same as the AIRNow report in the Ambient software, where data is put into a predetermined ASCII text format and then transmitted to the central AIRNow database at EPA’s Data

Collection Center via FTP. An example of the report is shown below.

To manually transfer the report that has been queried select the Transfer Now button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up a Select FTP Destination screen where an FTP Configuration can be selected by clicking the down arrow and selecting from the drop down list. The list of configurations is what has previously been configured under the AIRNow/FTP Setup screen. To setup this report to be automatically transferred, that will include all parameters enabled for AIRNow reporting, refer to

Chapter 4.16.1.c Adding an AIRNow FTP Transfer Task. To setup this report to be ran automatically so that you can pick which parameters are included on the report, refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a

Scheduled Report Task.

220

8.11 AQI Reports

To run an AQI report, expand AQI Reports from the Reports menu and single click AQI Report- Current,

Range, Standard, or Monthly. The AQI Report- Current, Range, Standard, or Monthly tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the

Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the

Report Output section.

Current shows data for the current hour. The Current method calculates the most recent hourly average.

Range shows data starting at midnight on the beginning date specified to the ending date and time specified. The Range method calculates from midnight to the current hour.

Standard shows the data 24 hours prior to the specified date and time given. The Standard method is based on the highest of 24 averages where each average consists of a 1 hour, 8 hour, or 24 hour running average depending on the averaging interval entered for the parameter in the AQI Configuration Editor.

For example, if the hour is 13:00 and the averaging interval is 8 hours, the first average will consist of an average of the values for hours 05:00 through 12:00. The second average will consist of an average of the values for hours 04:00 through 11:00. When it gets to the seventh average it will use hours 23:00 from the previous day through the 06:00 of the current day. This process continues until 24 averages are calculated. The AQI is then based on the highest of these 24 averages.

Monthly shows the index for each hour of each day along with the color of the index, as well as the peak for the day, the max for each hour of each day, and the pollutant responsible for the AQI.

Monthly Group shows the index for each hour of each day along with the color of the index, as well as the peak for the day, the max for each hour of each day, and the pollutant responsible for the AQI.

CSV Export is a csv format that can be saved as a file or exported to notepad.

XML Export is an xml format that can be save as a file or exported to notepad.

The data is reported slightly different than the other reports. For example: if the data is collected through the 10:00 hour, it is not reported as the value for 10:00, it is reported as the value for 11:00. If an N/A is in the Index column for a parameter it means that the average for the parameter was below the first index level, therefore, the average is not applicable. To have the average below the level to show on the report the Use Zero Scaling needs to be checked for the specific parameter in the AQI

Program Editor. These reports are displayed just as they are in the Ambient software with the exception of being displayed in a grid form, using the Air Quality Index as required in the Code of Federal

Regulations and Appendix G of 40 CFR 58. An example of each report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

221

Current

Range

222

Standard

Monthly

223

Monthly Group

CSV Export

224

XML Export

Levels

225

8.12 AQS Report

To run the AQS report, expand AQS Reports from the Reports menu and single click AQS Text or AQS

XML Report. The AQS Text or XML Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. These reports are exactly the same as the AQS or AIRS reports in the Ambient software. An example of each report is shown below.

When generating the AQS XML report you have the options of selecting a record type to produce the report with. The default selections are Average Data, Sample Data, and Composite Data, but you also have the option to select Cal Precision Data, which will only produce data if the level has been configured for PREC in the calibration phase in the calibration configuration in the Data Source Details screen. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report

Task.

Text 2.2

226

XML 2.2

227

XML 3.0

Monitor Assurance record

228

8.13 AIRNow CSV Text Report (AQCSV)

To run the AIRNow CSV report, expand the AIRNow Reports from the Reports menu and single click

AIRNow CSV Text Report. The AIRNow CSV Text Report tab will open on the right side of the screen.

After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the

Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section where data is put into a predetermined comma delimited text format. To run this report automatically, schedule a Report Task in the Task Scheduler and select AIRNOW CSV Text Report in the Report field under the Report Task Options section as the bottom. Under the File Output Options tab set the File

Extension to the agencies three digit code, and append the date in the format that EPA requires. Use the same FTP Transfer Program that is used for the standard AIRNow report. An example of the report is shown below.

Selecting the action code in the query will change the code number between 0 and 4 that will show in the third column of the output file.

To manually override the site code for a mobile site, use the Site Metatag in the Site setup screen in the

Site/Parameter menu under Configuration Editors. Enter in AQCSVSiteCode in the Metatag Name field, then add in the site code you want to use in the Value field. Click save when finished.

To manually transfer the report that has been queried select the Transfer Now button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up a Select FTP Destination screen where an FTP Configuration can be selected by clicking the down arrow and selecting from the drop down list. The list of configurations is what has previously been configured under the AIRNow/FTP Setup screen. . To setup this report to be automatically transferred, that will include all parameters enabled for AIRNow reporting, refer to

Chapter 4.16.1.c Adding an AIRNow FTP Transfer Task. To setup this report to be ran automatically so that you can pick which parameters are included on the report, refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a

Scheduled Report Task.

229

8.14 Violation of Standard

To run the Violation of Standards report single click the Violation of Standards Report from the Reports menu. The Violation of Standards Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.

This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameter is shown separately per page per month. Three years of data is required for this report to be able to

produce data. It is best to run the report for one parameter at a time, as the report will not show any data if one of the parameters selected does not have any data, it will state that there is no data even though at least one of the parameters has data. This report is exactly the same as the VOS report in the

Ambient software, where the report lists data averages that were in violation of NAAQS according to limits configured. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

The query for this report also has extra fields to be filled in:

Standard Violations section

Report Overlapping Violations – Click to put a check mark in the box only if you want the violations of the associated averaging intervals that overlap to be reported; otherwise, overlapping violation will not be reported.

230

8.15 Met Reports

8.15.1 Joint Frequency Distribution Report

To run the Joint Frequency Distribution report, expand Met Reports from the Reports menu and single click Joint Frequency Distribution Report. The Joint Frequency Distribution Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate

Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report

Output section. This report has to be ran one site and parameter at a time. This report is exactly the same as the Joint frequency distribution report in the Ambient software, and shows wind direction versus wind speed or pollutant. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

The query for this report also has extra fields to be filled in:

Wind/Pollution Rose Program – Click the down arrow and select the template from the drop down list that you want to use to report the needed data.

Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the data type from the drop down list that you want reported.

Wind Direction Parameter Selection – Select the site and wind direction parameter to be reported.

231

8.15.2 Wind/Pollution Rose

To run the Wind Rose, expand Met Reports from the Reports menu and single click Wind/Pollution Rose.

The Wind/Pollution Rose tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the rose by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the rose below the query in the Report Output section. This wind rose is exactly the same as the rose that comes up with the Joint frequency distribution report in the Ambient software, and shows wind direction versus wind speed or pollutant. An example of the wind rose is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

The query for this report also has extra fields to be filled in:

Wind/Pollution Rose Program – Click the down arrow and select the template from the drop down list that you want to use to report the needed data.

Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the data type from the drop down list that you want reported.

Wind Direction Parameter Selection – Select the site and wind direction parameter to be reported.

232

8.15.3 Meteorological Report

To run the meteorological report, expand Met Reports from the Reports menu and single click

Meteorological Report. The Meteorological Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown separately per each day per page. This report is displayed different but uses the same means as the

Met report in the Ambient software, and shows met data based on the lateral turbulence and wind speed method. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

233

234

8.16 Statistical Reports

8.16.1 Maximum Hourly Values

To run the maximum hourly report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click

Maximum Hourly Values. The Maximum Hourly Values tab will open on the right side of the screen.

After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the

Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section which shows a list of the highest averages, by rank, over a selected time frame. Each site and parameter is shown separately per page. This report is exactly the same as the Maximum hourly averages report in the Ambient software, and generates the highest averages by rand over a selected time period. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter

4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

This report also has extra fields to fill out in the query section.

Options section

Hours for Rolling Average – Use the radio buttons to select the number of hours you want to roll the average. The default is one hour.

Rolling Type – Select between rolling Forward or Backward. For example, if a three-hour average of hours 03, 04, and 05 should be tagged as occurring at 05, then select Backward. If this average should be tagged as occurring at 03, then select Forward. The default is Backward.

Report Highest Average Only

– Click to put a check mark in the box only if you want just the highest average.

The purpose of this option is to prevent reporting multiple averages from the same excursion and to comply with federal standards.

Report Overlapping Maximums – Click to put a check mark in the box only if the rolling average periods overlapped in time.

Number of Averages to Report – Use the radio buttons to select the total number of averages for the selected time period. Defaults to ten.

235

236

8.16.2 Data Recovery Report

To run the data recovery report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click Data

Recovery Report. The Data Recovery Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.

This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameters are shown separated section on each page. This report is exactly the same as the Data recovery report in the Ambient software, a summary of the percentage of total possible data points that were valid during a selected time period.

Valid Average Scans is the total reads taken for the specified time frame where valid hourly data was collected.

Valid Cal Scans is the total calibrations where the hourly data was invalid during the calibration.

Total Valid Scans is the total amount of reads before the subtraction of valid calibration scans. The

Total Valid Scans formula is the Valid Average Scans plus the Valid Calibration Scans equal the Total Valid

Scans.

Total Scans in Period is the amount of total reads before the subtraction of invalid reads where data was not present of invalid.

Percent Recovery is the percentage of total scans in a period. The Percent Recovery formula is the Total valid scans (or valid averages) divided by the Total scans (or possible averages) in the period. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter

4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

237

8.16.3 Network Data Recovery Report

To run the recovery report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click Network

Data Recovery Report. The Network Data Recovery Report tab will open on the right side of the screen.

After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the

Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameters are shown separated section on each page. A summary of the percentage of total possible data points that were valid during a selected time period. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report

Task.

238

8.16.4 Frequency Distribution

To run the frequency report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click

Frequency Distribution. The Frequency Distribution tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameters are shown separated section on each page. This report is exactly the same as the

Frequency report in the Ambient software. The frequency report calculates the distribution of data averages as a percentage of the total number of samples collected, and provides a breakdown of concentration values that represent the Nth percentiles of a requested data set. For example, the value under the 50% column means that 50% of the values over the selected time period are that value or below. Another example, if the 95th percentile for a pollutant for the given time period was 46 ppb, meaning that 95% of the pollutant readings were at or below 46 ppb. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report

Task.

239

8.16.5 Concentration Distribution

To run the concentration report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click

Concentration Distribution Report. The Concentration Distribution Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each parameter is shown separately per page, and show the number of readings that fall into user-defined concentration ranges. This report is exactly the same as the Concentration distribution report in the Ambient software. The data averages are parsed into the respective ranges as described under the Annual SLAMS (State and Local Air Monitoring Summary) Air Quality Information. The number of averages that occurred in each range is reported. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

240

8.16.6 Data Analysis

To run the Data Analysis report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click Data

Analysis Report. The Data Analysis tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Data Analysis is an open system used to create reports and graphical summaries designed for a specific task based on categorization of the data. It is useful for creating unusual reports, for example average ozone value on Tuesdays. First select

Start and End dates Site/Parameter(s), and an Average Interval. Data Analysis is more useful for looking at a single parameter at a time for one or more sites, for example, ozone for the month of August.

Default filters are Site, Parameter, and Report Value (Average). To add more Filter Fields, right-click in

Drop Filter Fields area and select Show Field List, or click Show Column Choose on the ribbon at the top of the screen . From the pop-up list select and click the Add to Filter Area button, or click-drag to the

‘Drag Filter Fields Here’ area.

Data Analysis Tool with new Filter Field of Week Day Name put in the column area. After dragging a new Filter Field to the ‘Drop Filter Fields Here’ area, which is a holding area where fields are not active but available for immediate reactivation, the new field will not be activated until you drag it to the column area. Once in the column area the new field information will be displayed. This example shows the new Filter Field Week Day Name. Scroll to the bottom of the report to see Totals. If Week Day is selected instead of Week Day Name, it will give a numerically ordered display. To remove a header, right-click the header and select Hide. To deactivate a header drag it back to the inactive area.

241

Data Analysis Tool with Hour added as a new Filter Field, which shows a grid with Hour selected as a new Filter Field. Since the grid can be large, you could drag the Date field up the ‘Drag Filter Fields Here’ area and deactivate the Date column.

Data Analysis Tool with the Date column deactivated. In this example a grid with Hour selected as a new

Filter Field. Since the grid can be large, the Date field can be drug up to the ‘Drag Filter Fields Here’ area and deactivate the Date column.

242

Data Analysis Tool with the Date and Interval columns deactivated. In this example only one Interval was selected (001h), so the grid further simplified by deactivating the Interval column, by dragging it to the ‘Drop Filter Fields Here’ area.

Data Analysis Tool with the Date and Interval columns deactivated. With the Hour moved to the ‘Drag

Row Fields’ area, and Week Day Name moved back into the column area for the Reports menu.

If the Interval column is deactivated by moving it to the ‘Drop Filter Fields Here’ area, how the rows are displayed can be controlled. For example, drag the Hour field into the ‘Drag Row Fields Here’ area and the Week Day Name back into the column area. This example shows composite statistics for a month, broken down by hour and day of the week, but you can combine data for more than one site by using filters to break down data into different categories. If Site is moved back to the holding area, the filter will be removed and data will be grouped together, which causes the scroll bar to be removed and the second site can also be seen. Multiple parameters could also be grouped or merged; for example when ozone parameters use different names.

Left click on the Report Value, and select one from the following options: Count, Sum, Min, Max,

Average. Changing this selection can be helpful for answering questions like “What is the highest value for Monday, 9 a.m. for the entire year?”

243

Saving Grid Layouts as Favorites

The Favorites editor only saves the data query itself, not the changes in filters. To save an analysis layout, click Save Grid Layout or Apply Grid Layout on the Ribbon at the top.

Chart Display

To display the data analysis report as a chart, click the Show Chart button on the Ribbon at the top of the page and select a row, column, or range of cells. This example shows a Point graph by Hour.

244

8.16.6.a Data Analysis Tool Sample Output

The Data Analysis Tool can be used to create ad hoc reports and graphs correlating data sets with parameters, such as hour of the day, day of the week or month, and identify composite statistics and trends. These examples show day of the week averages and hour of the day averages for larger data sets.

Data Analysis Tool Sample Output

245

246

8.16.7 Statistical Report

To run the statistical report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click Statistical

Report. The Statistical Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameter is separated into sections on each page. An example of the report is shown below.

The purpose of the statistical report is to provide a report for a review of a range of data against historical statistics and identify unusual conditions, as well as a comparison against previous years of the same parameter and date/time range, with calculated ratios. This report is similar to the Statistical functions in the Data Editor and used to identify data that lies outside the norm. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

247

8.17 Sample Data Reports

8.17.1 Monthly Sample Data Report

To run the monthly sample report, expand Sample Data Reports from the Reports menu and single click

Monthly Sample Data Report. The Monthly Sample Data Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query that shows each parameter per page, and is meant to be ran for a month’s worth of averages but can also be ran for daily data as well.

This report is similar to the Monthly non-continuous summary report in the Ambient software. An example of the report is shown below.

248

8.17.2 Sample Hourly Daily Comparison Report

To run the sample hourly daily comparison, expand Sample Data Reports from the Reports menu and single click Sample Hourly Daily Comparison Report. The Sample Hourly Daily Comparison Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query.

This report allows

FRM sample data and hourly Particulate Matter data to be compared. No other report can do this because of the different sections of the database each type of data is stored.

An example of the report is shown below.

249

8.17.3 Sample/Hourly Comparison Graph

To run the sample /hourly comparison graph, expand Sample Data Reports from the Reports menu and single click Sample/ Hourly Comparison Graph. The Sample /Hourly Comparison Graph tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the graph by selecting the Generate

Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the graph below the query. To change the charted lines to gray, check the box beside of Use Grayscale Lines on the query selection. To use dynamic scaling, check the box beside of Use Dynamic Scaling on the query selection. An example of the report is shown below.

250

8.17.4 Basic Sample Data Export

To run the basic sample data export, expand Sample Data Reports from the Reports menu and single click Basic Sample Data Export. The Basic Sample Data Export tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query. An example of the report is shown below.

251

8.18 Annotations Report

To run the annotations report, expand the Notation Reports from the Reports menu and single click

Annotations Report. The Annotations Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.

This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameter are shown separately per page just the same as it does in the Ambient software. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled

Report Task.

252

8.19 Audit Trail Report

To run the audit trail, expand the Notation Reports from the Reports menu and single click Audit Trail

Report. The Audit Trail Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameter is shown separately per page, unlike the Ambient software where it was displayed in a grid form from within the

Matrix Editor. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

253

8.20 Configuration Reports

8.20.1 Site Configuration Report

To run the site configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click Site

Configuration Report. The Site Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Multiple sites are shown on each page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the Site Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.

254

8.20.2 Parameter Configuration Report

To run the parameter configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click Parameter Configuration Report. The Parameter Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and its parameters are shown separately per page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.

255

8.20.3 Channel Configuration Report

To run the channel configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click

Channel Configuration Report. The Channel Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and its parameters are shown separately per page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.

256

8.20.4 Calibration Configuration Report

To run the calibration configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click Calibration Configuration Report. The Calibration Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and all of its calibration sequences are shown separately per page, the same as the

Ambient software when running the Calibration Configuration under the Network configuration report.

An example of the report is shown below.

257

8.20.5 Scheduled Tasks Report

To run the scheduled tasks report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click

Scheduled Tasks Report. The Scheduled Tasks Report tab will open on the right side of the screen.

There is no query to be selected on this screen, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section.

This report is similar to the Ambient software when running the Scheduler Setup and Polling Tasks under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.

258

8.20.6 Calibration Configuration Report

To run the calibration configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click Calibration Configuration Report. The Calibration Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and all of its calibration sequences are shown separately per page, the same as the

Ambient software when running the Calibration Configuration under the Network configuration report.

An example of the report is shown below.

259

8.20.7 Calibration Alarm Configuration Report

To run the calibration alarm report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click

Calibration Alarm Configuration Report. The Calibration Alarm Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate

Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report

Output section. Each site and all of its calibration sequences are shown separately per page, the same as the Ambient software when running the Calibration Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.

260

8.20.8 Logger Configuration Report

To run the logger configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and ingle click

Logger Configuration Report. The Logger Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section.

Multiple sites are shown on each page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the

Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.

261

8.20.9 GSI Configuration Report

To run the GSI configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click GSI

Configuration Report. The GSI Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more GSI drivers, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the

Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each driver is shown separately per page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the

Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.

262

8.20.10 Analog Outputs Configuration Report

To run the analog out configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click Analog Outputs Configuration Report. The Analog Outputs Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate

Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report

Output section. Each site is shown separately per page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.

263

8.20.11 Digital IO Configuration Report

To run the digital IO configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click

Digital IO Configuration Report. The Digital IO Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section.

Multiple sites are shown per page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the

Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.

264

8.20.12 Scheduled Tasks Report

To run the scheduled tasks report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click

Scheduled Tasks Report. The Scheduled Tasks Report tab will open on the right side of the screen.

There is no query to be selected on this screen, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section.

This report is similar to the Ambient software when running the Scheduler Setup and Polling Tasks under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.

265

8.20.13 Average Alarm Report

To run the average alarm report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click Average

Alarm Report. The Average Alarm Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.

This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and its parameters are shown separately per page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the Instrument

Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.

266

8.21 Cumulative Report

To run the cumulative report single click the Cumulative Report from the Reports menu and the

Cumulative Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query that shows parameters, units, and the values for each parameter under the site column. The values are cumulative over the time frame that was entered into the query selection. The

Ambient software does not have such a report. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.

267

8.22 Basic Data Export

The purpose of the basic export feature is to export data without limits on the number of columns, page breaks between sites or days, and more suitable for automated importing to some place such as a web site, for example. To run the data export, expand Average Reports from the Reports menu and single click Basic Data Export. The Basic Data Export tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.

This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameter name is shown in columns on one page until it is filled then it will wrap to the second page. Invalid data is not included on the report. An example of the report is shown below.

268

8.23 Average Data Graph Report

The purpose of the average data graph in a report is so that it doesn’t have to be printed or exported from the Average Data Editor. To run the average data graph, expand Average Reports from the Reports menu and single click Average Data Graph Report. The Average Data Graph Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate

Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report

Output section. There are four chart options that the report can be ran with; Use Dynamic Scaling, Use

Grayscale Lines, Suppress Flag Point Colors, and Show Invalid as Empty. An example of the report is shown below with Use Dynamic Scaling and Show Invalid as empty selected.

269

8.24 Site Health Report

To run the Site Health Report single click the Site Health Report from the Reports menu and the Site

Health Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query that shows site(s), parameters and their max, min, and average values, primary measurements, secondary measurements, logbook report, and calibration report. The Ambient software does not have such a report. An example of the report is shown below.

270

271

Chapter 9: Additional Modules

9.1 Favorites Editor

To setup a favorite single, click the Favorites Editor from the Configuration Editors menu. The Favorites

Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. As favorites are added they will appear in the

Selected Favorite section on the left of the setup screen.

To add a favorite, select the Add Favorite button on the ribbon at the top. It will clear the fields on the right side of the Selected Favorite column.

To change an existing favorite, single click on the blue square on the left side of the favorite name in the

Selected favorite column so that the row is highlighted. The setting s for the favorite will open on the right side of the screen. Make needed changes to the details or the query .

To delete a favorite, single click on the blue square on the left side of the favorite name in the Selected favorite column so that the row is highlighted. Select the Delete Favorite button on the ribbon at the top. It will delete the selected favorite without prompting.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Favorites Editor screen, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen

To create a favorite from any other editor or report, complete the desired query, and select the

Favorites tab above the Ribbon at the top. The Ribbon will change to show the Favorites buttons.

Select the Save as Favorite button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up Add a Favorite box with the setup fields for the Favorite Detail section explained below. To make changes to a favorite created from an editor or report, simply open the favorite in the Favorites Editor to make adjustments.

Favorite Detail tab

Favorite Details section

Menu Item – Click the down arrow and select a menu from the drop down list.

Favorite Name – Enter in the name that you choose to call the menu for your own reference, or you can accept the default that it gives.

Favorite Description – Enter in the description of the name you have chosen to call the menu selection, or it can be left blank.

Favorite Scope – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list if this favorite is to be used by a specific user or all users.

User – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which user this setting is to be applied to.

272

Launch on Application Startup – Click to check the box to launch the application that has been chosen for the favorite at the startup of AirVision.

Run Launch on Query – Click to check the box to execute the query that has been setup under the Favorite Query tab when this Favorite is selected.

Favorite Query tab

Date Range Selection

Current Day, Month, Quarter, Week, and Year – Does not use the date and look back fields and simply uses the current date range that is selected.

Fixed Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the Start and End Date fields the date range this report is include data.

Last Month, Quarter, and Week – Does not use the date and look back fields and simply uses the previous date range that is selected from the current date.

Days Back – Use the radio buttons or type in the Look Back Days field the number of days you want to the report to go back to and get data from.

Parameter Selection section – Select the site and parameter that is to be included on this report.

Average Interval section – Select the type of data that is to be included on this report.

Query String section – Shows the string being used to create this report. If you use the Clear Selection button it will remove the string and it cannot be brought back without being manually typed in or the task deleted and recreated

273

Once you have save the menu as a favorite, you can test it be clicking the Test button on the Ribbon at the top.

My Favorites Editor

The My Favorites Editor can be accessed from the Configuration Editors or from the Favorites Tab above the Ribbon at the top. My Favorites will allow the user that is logged into the software to edit that user’s own favorites. It works in the same manner as the basic Favorites Editor with the exception the

Favorite Scope field and the User field, which are not accessible as they are specific to the user logged in.

274

9.2 Server Restart

To manually restart the service, single click Server Restart from the Utilities menu. The Server Restart tab will open on the right side of the screen. Select the executive you want to restart by clicking in the blue box on the left side of the executive name to highlight the row. Select the Restart Executive

Service button on the Ribbon at the top. It will ask if you are sure you want to restart the selected executive service. Select Yes and the service will restart, select No and the service will remain in its current state.

275

9.3 SQL Execution Tool

To execute a SQL statement, single click SQL Execution Tool from the Utilities menu. The SQL Execution

Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen. After entering in the SQL statement in the SQL Query

Test to Execute section, select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. The results will bring up a Query Results tab beside of the Messages tab in the lower section. The Query Results tab will be in focus and will display the results of the statement that was executed. To view the message information click the Messages tab to see how many records were affected and how long it took the query to run.

Examples are shown below.

276

To load an existing SQL file, select the Load SQL File button or Load Saved XML Results button on the

Ribbon at the top. It will bring up an Open box like you are used to seeing in Windows, where you can browse to the location of the existing file that you want to execute.

You can also export the results to Excel or XML or simply save the executed query to a file.

277

9.4 AQS Import Tools

9.4.1 AQS Text Import Tool

To run the Text Import Tool, single click the AQS Text Import Tool from the Utilities menu. The AQS Text

Import Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen.

Select the Browse button at the end of the Location of AQS Text File to Import field. This will bring up a

Select Import File box where you can browse to the location of where the AQS file is stored that you want to import. Once the file has been selected it will show the path to the file and the file name in the import field. Select the Process Import button on the Ribbon at the top.

The data is imported by matching the EPA codes in the file with the EPA codes set in the sites and parameters to import the data to the correct location in the database. The text import can import hourly data, 24 hour data records for particulate data, and PARS pipe delimited records , but it cannot import 5 minute SO2 data.

9.4.2 AQS XML Import Tool

To run the XML Import Tool, single click the AQS XML Import Tool from the Utilities menu. The AQS XML

Import Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen.

Select the Browse button at the end of the Location of AQS XML File to Import field. This will bring up a

Select Import File box where you can browse to the location of where the AQS XML file is stored that you want to import. Once the file has been selected it will show the path to the file and the file name in the import field. Select the Process Import button on the Ribbon at the top.

The data is imported by matching the EPA codes in the file with the EPA codes set in the sites and parameters to import the data to the correct location in the database. The XML import can only import hourly data records.

278

9.5 Database Export

To run the Database Export, expand Table Import/Export from the Utilities menu and single click

Database Export. The Database Export tab will open on the right side of the screen.

In the Export Options section select the date range of data that is to be exported along with the configuration. Select the Browse button at the end of the Location of File to Export field. This will bring up an Export File Location box where you can browse to the location of where the zipped XML files are to be exported to. Once the location has been selected it will show the path to the file and the file name in the export field. Select the Process Export button on the Ribbon at the top. The configuration is exported to a zipped file that holds the XML files. The purpose of this export function is to help Agilaire in the need to troubleshooting the customer’s database. This form of exporting should not be used as a primary backup process for the database.

279

9.6 Creating the CLAIRE Files to Update the CLAIRE System

The CLAIRE system gets its information from a number of files, but mainly the VoiceAQI file. The

VoiceAQI file is created from the AQI setup. Any parameter that is used in the CLAIRE system has to setup in the AQI Editor for a 24 hour Average Period. The VoiceAQI file used by the CLAIRE system has to be created automatically. This is done by obtaining a license key from Agilaire that will enable the

Claire function, and a script from Agilaire that is to be ran in the SQL Execution Tool, that will automatically create the tasks in the Task Scheduler. The task will need to be slightly adjusted to run with the customers AirVision settings. To do this go through the following steps.

Step 1. Save the license key file to the AirVision hard drive that was provided to you by Agilaire. Then close all tabs in AirVision. Open the Feature Licensing Tool under Utilities. Highlight the text in the top section and delete it. Select the Load License File button on the Ribbon at the top.

Browse to where you stored the license key file and double click the (*)_Key.txt to open the file.

Copy and paste the test into the top section of the Feature Licensing Tool. Select the Apply

License Key button on the Ribbon at the top. Close and reopen the AirVision software and log in for the Claire settings to be added to the AirVision software.

Step 2. Open the SQL Execution Tool located under Utilities. Copy and paste the SQL script that was provided to you by Agilaire, into the top section of the SQL tool. Select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top to execute the script. When it has finished it will say one row affected in the bottom section of the tool. Close the SQL Execution Tool. This process will add the needed task to the Task Scheduler to automatically create the files needed for the Claire system.

Step 3. The task will be added to the end of the list of scheduled tasks that have been created. Select the task called VoiceAQI to bring up its settings in the blue area at the bottom. This is a group task. The name of the task needs to remain VoiceAQI in order for this task to run properly.

Step 4. Under the Task Schedule Details section the start time default to the current date and time that the script was ran to create the task. The time will need to be adjusted so that the task is scheduled to run after the polling task that collects the hourly data has completed and updated the data to the database. In order to the Claire system to stay updated the Repeat Interval will need to be set to run once and hour.

Step 5. Under the Task Details section the Task Name needs to remain defaulted to VoiceAQI, and the task needs to be enabled.

280

Step 6. Under the Group Options sections, check the box to Execute Tasks in Parallel.

Step 7. There will be five sub tasks listed; VoiceAQI.DAT, VoiceAQI.BAK,LastAQI.DAT, LastAQI.TMP, and AQIDates.DAT. All of these sub task names need to remain defaulted and enabled.

Changing any of these names or disabling them will cause the task to stop functioning and the

Claire system will no longer receive updated data.

Step 8. At the end of the row for the VoiceAQI.DAT, click the Edit Task button and it will open a task window for the VoiceAQI.DAT. a. The Task Name needs to remain VoiceAQI.DAT and enabled. b. Under the Report Task Options section the Report field needs to remain set to Voice AQI

Report. c. Only if a smaller selection of parameters needs to be selected should tbe settings under the

Configure Report Query button be changed, otherwise it will use all of the parameters setup

in the AQI Program Editor for 24 hour Average Period, rolling backward and truncated. The

rest of the settings for the Configure Report Query button should remain defualted. d. Select the File Output Options tab. The Output File Type field should remain defaulted to

Export File as Text. e. Under the File Name Construction section, the File Output Base Name field needs to remain

defaulted to VoiceAQI. The File Extension field needs to remain defualted to DAT.

f. The Append Date To File Name section needs to remain blank. g. Under the Save File Options section, the Save Report to File Enabled needs to remain

checked. The File Output Path field is defaulted to C:\Data|Claire Test, however, this field

does need to be changed to location on the customer’s network that the Claire system can

access. Click the Browse button at the end of the field to select the path to the location the

file needs to be written to. h. The Upload File Via FTP Options section needs to remain blank. Click OK when finish.

Step 9. At the end of the row for the VoiceAQI.BAK, click the Edit Task button and it will open a task window for the VoiceAQI.BAK. a. The Task Name needs to remain VoiceAQI.BAK and enabled. b. Under the Report Task Options section the Report field needs to remain set to Voice AQI

BAK Report. c. Only if a smaller selection of parameters needs to be selected should tbe settings under the

281

Configure Report Query button be changed, otherwise it will use all of the parameters setup

in the AQI Program Editor for 24 hour Average Period, rolling backward and truncated. The

rest of the settings for the Configure Report Query button should remain defualted. If the

list of parameters are changed they must match the list that was selected under the

VoiceAQI.DAT sub task in Step 8. d. Select the File Output Options tab. The Output File Type field should remain defaulted to

Export File as Text. e. Under the File Name Construction section, the File Output Base Name field needs to remain

defaulted to VoiceAQI. The File Extension field needs to remain defualted to BAK.

f. The Append Date To File Name section needs to remain blank. g. Under the Save File Options section, the Save Report to File Enabled needs to remain

checked. The File Output Path field is defaulted to C:\Data|Claire Test, however, this field

does need to be changed to location on the customer’s network that the Claire system can

access. Click the Browse button at the end of the field to select the path to the location the

file needs to be written to. This has to be the same location as to where the VoiceAQI.DAT

file is being written to in Step 8. h. The Upload File Via FTP Options section needs to remain blank. Click OK when finish.

Step 10. At the end of the row for the LastAQI.DAT, click the Edit Task button and it will open a task window for the LastAQI.DAT. a. The Task Name needs to remain LastAQI.DAT and enabled. b. In the Report Task Options section the Report field needs to remain set to LastAQI Report. c. Only if a smaller selection of parameters needs to be selected should tbe settings under the

Configure Report Query button be changed, otherwise it will use all of the parameters setup

in the AQI Program Editor for 24 hour Average Period, rolling backward and truncated. The

rest of the settings for the Configure Report Query button should remain defualted. If the

list of parameters are changed they must match the list that was selected under the

VoiceAQI.DAT sub task in Step 8. d. Select the File Output Options tab. The Output File Type should remain defaulted to Export

File as Text. e. Under the File Name Construction section, the File Output Base Name field needs to remain

defaulted to LastAQI. The File Extension field needs to remain defualted to DAT.

f. The Append Date To File Name section needs to remain blank. g. Under the Save File Options section, the Save Report to File Enabled needs to remain

checked. The File Output Path field is defaulted to C:\Data|Claire Test, however, this field

does need to be changed to location on the customer’s network that the Claire system can

access. Click the Browse button at the end of the field to select the path to the location the

file needs to be written to. This has to be the same location as to where the VoiceAQI.DAT

file is being written to in Step 8. h. The Upload File Via FTP Options section needs to remain blank. Click OK when finish.

Step 11. At the end of the row for the LastAQI.TMP, click the Edit Task button and it will open a task window for the LastAQI.TMP. a. The Task Name needs to remain LastAQI.TMP and enabled. b. In the Report Task Options section the Report field needs to remain set to VoiceAQILastTmp

Report. c. Only if a smaller selection of parameters needs to be selected should tbe settings under the

Configure Report Query button be changed, otherwise it will use all of the parameters setup

282

in the AQI Program Editor for 24 hour Average Period, rolling backward and truncated. The

rest of the settings for the Configure Report Query button should remain defualted. If the

list of parameters are changed they must match the list that was selected under the

VoiceAQI.DAT sub task in Step 8. d. Select the File Output Options tab. The Output File Type should remain defaulted to Export

File as Text. e. Under the File Name Construction section, the File Output Base Name field needs to remain

defaulted to LastAQI. The File Extension field needs to remain defualted to TMP.

f. The Append Date To File Name section needs to remain blank. g. Under the Save File Options section, the Save Report to File Enabled needs to remain

checked. The File Output Path field is defaulted to C:\Data|Claire Test, however, this field

does need to be changed to location on the customer’s network that the Claire system can

access. Click the Browse button at the end of the field to select the path to the location the

file needs to be written to. This has to be the same location as to where the VoiceAQI.DAT

file is being written to in Step 8. h. The Upload File Via FTP Options section needs to remain blank. Click OK when finish.

Step 12. At the end of the row for the AQIDates.DAT, click the Edit Task button and it will open a task window for the AQIDates.DAT. a. The Task Name needs to remain AQIDates.DAT and enabled. b. In the Report Task Options section the Report field needs to remain set to VoiceAQIDates

Report. c. Only if a smaller selection of parameters needs to be selected should tbe settings under the

Configure Report Query button be changed, otherwise it will use all of the parameters setup

in the AQI Program Editor for 24 hour Average Period, rolling backward and truncated. The

rest of the settings for the Configure Report Query button should remain defualted. If the

list of parameters are changed they must match the list that was selected under the

VoiceAQI.DAT sub task in Step 8. d. Select the File Output Options tab. The Output File Type should remain defaulted to Export

File as Text. e. Under the File Name Construction section, the File Output Base Name field needs to remain

defaulted to AQIDates. The File Extension field needs to remain defualted to DAT.

f. The Append Date To File Name section needs to remain blank. g. Under the Save File Options section, the Save Report to File Enabled needs to remain

checked. The File Output Path field is defaulted to C:\Data|Claire Test, however, this field

does need to be changed to location on the customer’s network that the Claire system can

access. Click the Browse button at the end of the field to select the path to the location the

file needs to be written to. This has to be the same location as to where the VoiceAQI.DAT

file is being written to in Step 8. h. The Upload File Via FTP Options section needs to remain blank. Click OK when finish.

Step 13. Click the Save save when finished.

283

Important Note: Once the CLAIRE system is being updated by the data from AirVision, sites can no longer be imported by the Import Sites button in the CLAIRE software. If the Import Sites button is clicked it will corrupt the database and cause the software to start to give error messages. The only way to restore the database once this is done is to restore a backup database.

If a backup database does not exist, one should be created at this time. Because CLAIRE’s database is an

Access file, to make a backup copy of the database simply close CLAIRE and select and copy the recordinginfo.mdb file and paste it in a safe location that it can be retrieved from in the case that it has to be put back into place.

If new sites and parameters need to be added to CLAIRE, then they will need to be added to the old

Ambient system, the CLAIRE directory changed to look at the Ambient config, then the sites and parameters can be re-imported. Otherwise, you will need to keep a copy of the Ambient configuration so that it can be provided to Agilaire, along with the information that is to be added so the files can be reconfigured with the new site(s) and parameters.

284

Chapter 10: Security

To open the security editors, expand Security from the Configuration Editors menu and single click wither Group Permissions, Groups Editor, My User Settings, or User Editor. The editor’s tab will open on the right side of the screen. The default database has been setup with an administrative login called

Admin. Each editor is described below.

10.1 User Editor

To add a new user, select the Add User button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields on the right side of the screen, which are described below. As users are added they will appear in the Users

column on the left of the setup screen.

To open an existing user, single click the user name in the Users column on the left side of the editor and it will open their setting on the right side. Existing user names cannot be changed. If the user name is in need of being changed the user will have to be deleted, saved, and re-entered in with the new user name and password.

To delete an existing user, single click the user name from the list in the Users column that you want to remove. Select the Delete User button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the user is immediately removed from the list.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the User Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick

Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

User Details section

Account

User Name – Enter in a name that represents the user.

Email – If this user is to receive any of the email alarms or reports enter in the users email address.

Enabled – If this user is to be active with using the software, the enabled box will need to be checked. If a user is temporarily moved to another division, and you don’t want their login to be active while they are away, you can simple disable their login by removing the check mark until they return to original position.

Set User Password button – Click the password button to open a smaller box that will have a field to enter in the password and another field to confirm the password you just entered.

285

Name – In the case that you gave a user a login and password that is not their name but you want to keep track of who the user login and passwords belong to you can fill in the information fields for First, Middle, Last, and Title. None of which are required.

Contact Addresses

Add… Contact Address button – This button allows you to add multiple emails for the same user account. Depending on which boxes are checked for each email will depend on what gets sent to that particular email address. For example: if you have Report

Notifications checked for more than one email address, when that user is selected for reports in the Notification Subscription setup it will send the selected reports to the emails that were selected for Report Notifications in the setup of the User Editor. What get sent to any of the additional emails will also be sent to the main email setup for the user.

Type – Default is Email, but could be changed to text in the event that the ADVP is controlling what is being sent out.

Label – Type in this field what the email is to be receiving. For example: if you have

Report Notifications checked you could type Reports in this field. There cannot be two of the Label fields identical for the same user, even if the email is different. If you try to use the same label for more than one email it will give a SQL error.

Address – Enter in an email address different than any of the other email address setup for the user.

Tasks Notifications – Check this box to have notifications that have been setup in the

Task Scheduler sent to the selected email.

Report Notifications – Check this box to have reports sent to the selected email.

Alarm Notifications – Check this box to have notifications of alarms sent to the selected email.

ADVP Notifications – Check this box to have ADVP messages sent to the selected email.

286

10.2 My User Info

A user can make changes to their login by opening My User Info. The User Name is grayed out by default as it cannot be changed by the user that is not the administrator. However the user can change their password, email address, first, middle, or last name, and their title, or any of the additional emails and notification options the user has setup.

After making any changes in My User Info, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

10.3 Groups Editor

After adding users you have to add the users to a group in order for the users to have permission to use certain or all screens. Users can be members of multiple groups as security is attached to the group not the individual user.

To add a new group, select the Add Group button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put a blank field at the bottom of the groups section where you would enter in the name of the group and a description of who is in the group. Click the blank asterisks row under the Users in group section and click the down arrow and select a user. If more than one user is to be added to the group then select the next blank link under the Users in group and click the down arrow and select another user. Continue with these steps until you have added the needed users.

To open an existing group, single click on the left side of the group name under the Groups section. It will open the users in that group under the Users in group section.

To delete an existing group, single click the group under the Groups section Test Selection section that you want to remove. Select the Delete Group button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the group is immediately removed from the list.

To delete one user from a group, single click the group you want to delete from under the Group column on the left side of the screen, then single click the user you want to delete from under the Users in group column on the right side of the screen, and press the delete key on the keyboard. A message will appear prompting if you are sure you want to delete the row that has been selected. Click Yes to delete

287

the user or Click No to cancel the deletion. If the user is deleted click the Save button before proceeding to any other step. Do not delete more than one user at a time before clicking Save, or it will generate errors.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Groups Editor, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

10.4 Group Permissions

After adding a group(s) you have to add the permissions for each group in order for the users in the groups to have permission to use certain or all screens.

To add a new group permission, click the down arrow at the top in the Group field and select the group from the drop down list that needs permissions setup and it will list the users that was setup for that group. Select one of the users in the list under the Users in group section. Select on the right side under the Available permissions section what you want that user to have permissions to. Select the Add

Permission button on the Ribbon at the top. Once a permission has been added to a user the text will darken in and the word Assigned will be placed in the right column beside of the permission you enabled. If the permissions you have added pertain to all of the sites simply click the box beside of

Apply to all sites under the Limit to sites section. If it pertains to certain sites uncheck the box for all site and click the down arrow and select a site per each row. Keep repeating the steps until you have selected all of the permission you want the user(s) to have and for the needed sites. Repeat these steps with each user until finished.

To open an existing group permission, click the down arrow in the Group field at the top and select the group from the drop down list. Select the user under the Users in group section and it will show the permissions setup for that user on the right side under the Available permissions section. As you select a site and parameter the fields in the other four sections will change to reveal the setting for that parameter. If you select a permission for a user by mistake simply select the group for that user and select the user, then select the permission and select the Remove Permission button on the Ribbon at the top. It will remove the Assigned tag beside of the permission.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Group Permissions Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

Child permissions can added or delete in the same manner as described above.

Important! When permissions are added to a group, all users in that group get the same permissions.

Different permissions cannot be given to different users under the same group. If a user needs to have

288

different permissions that the rest of the users in a particular group; that user will need to be added to another group or removed from the existing group and added to a different group, or possibly put in a group by themselves.

289

Chapter 11: Quick Reference to the Software

11.1 AirVision menus compared to Ambient menus

In AirVision

AIRNow can be found…..

Configuration Editors…..

Site/Parameter

In Ambient

Parameter Template

Report Configuration….

AIRNow / FTP Setup

Reports…..

AIRNow Reports…..

AIRNow Report

Manual Transfer

AIRNow AQCSV Report

Manual Transfer

Task Scheduler……

AIRNow/FTP Transfer Task

Scheduled Report Task….

FTP transfer

AIRNow can be found…..

FTP/AIRNow…..

Setup…..

Setup polling tasks…

Report Information

Manual Transfer……

Alarms can be found…..

Configuration Editors.….

Alarms can be found…..

Setup…..

Email Alarm Trigger Editor

Task Scheduler

Set up report email information

Set up pager information

Reports / Logger Reports….. Set up advanced pager and email

Alarm Journal

AQI can be found…..

Configuration Editors…..

Site/Parameter

Report Configurations….

AQI Program Editor

Reports….

AQI Report – Current

AQI Report – Standard

Information

Set up advanced config options

Edit average alarms

AQI can be found…..

Ambient…..

Set up AQI levels

Set up EPA codes

AQI report

AQI Report –Range

AQI Levels Report

AQI Monthly Report

290

AQI Monthly Group Report

Voice AQI Report (for CLAIRE users only)

AQS can be found…..

Configuration Editors….

Site/Parameter

Flags Editor

Utilities…..

AQS Text Import Tool (2.2)

AQS XML Import Tool (2.2)

Reports…..

AQS 2.2 Text Report

AQS 2.2 XML Report

AQS 3.0 XML Report

Calibrations can be found…..

Configuration Editors…..

Data Source Details….

Site…..

Logger…..

Calibrations

Calibration Expected Value Editor……

Reports…..

Calibration Reports…..

Calibration Results

Calibration Trend Graph

Calibration Export

Calibration X Bar R Viewer

Multi Phase Calibration Report

USEPA Cal Zero Drift Report

Configuration….

Calibration Configuration Report

Calibration Alarm Configuration Report

Data Editors…..

Calibration Data Editor

Calibration Adjust Tool -

(enabled with special key)

Channels/Parameters can be found…..

Configuration Editors…..

Data Source Details…

Channels Editor

Parameter Template

Site/Parameter

AQS can be found…..

Ambient…..

Set up EPA codes

EPA…..

Generate re-engineered AIRS output

Import re-engineered AIRS data

Calibration can be found…..

Setup……

Set up calibration information

Quick expected value editor

Reports…..

Calibration report

Channels/Parameter can be found…..

Setup…..

Instrument information

291

Configuration Reports can be found…..

Reports…..

Configuration…..

Configuration Reports can be found…..

Reports…..

Network configuration report

Analog Outputs Configuration Report

Average Alarm Report

Calibration Alarm Configuration Report

Calibration Configuration Report

Channel Configuration Report

Digital IO Configuration Report

GSI Configuration Report

Logger Configuration Report

Math Equation Report

Notification Configuration Report

Parameter Configuration Report

Scheduled Task Report

Site Configuration Report

Data can be found…..

Reports…..

Average Reports…..

Data with Flags

Basic Data Export

Summary Reports…..

Data can be found…..

Reports…..

Data reports

Minute summary report

Hourly summary report

Daily summary report

Multi hourly monthly report

Non-continuous report

Monthly non-continuous monthly reports

Daily Parameter Report

Daily Summary Report

Monthly Report

Sample Data Reports…..

Monthly Sample Report

Basic Sample Data Export

Data Editors…..

Average Data Editor

Sample Data Editor

Editors…..

Add or edit offline data

Matrix data editor

Batch edit data and flags

Move raw to validated data

Particulate calculation editor

Non-Continuous data editor

Flags can be found…..

Configuration Editors …..

Flags Editor

Data Editors….

Average Data Editor

Flags can be found…..

Matrix data editor……

Flags……

Edit Flags

Set Flag Colors and Null Value Codes

Add User Flag

Reports…..

Flag report

292

Logger can be found…..

Configuration Editors…..

Task Scheduler

Utilities…..

Link to Logger

Logger Download

Manual Poll

Status Displays…..

Log Viewer

Task Status

Reports……..

Logger Reports…..

Alarm Journal

Central Messages

Input Line Status Report

Power Failure Report

Internal Reports…..

Journal Message Log

Logs can be found…..

Data Editors…..

LogBook Entry Editor

Reports…..

LogBook Report

Alarm Journal

Internal Reports…..

Journal Message Log

Logger Reports…..

Central Messages

Input Line Status Report

Power Failure Report

Status Displays…….

Task Status

Log Viewer

List Editors…..

Log Book Category Editor

Logins & Passwords can be found…..

Configuration Editors…..

Security

Meteorological can be found…..

Configuration Editors…..

Report Configurations….

Logger can be found…..

Setup…..

Polling tasks

Build strings to configure data logger

Selective instrument download to data logger

Editors…..

Scheduled tasks

Utilities…..

Link to logger

Manual Poll

Reports…..

Status reports…..

Communication Log

Power Failures

New Input Line Status Changes

Historical Input Line Status Changes

Operator Messages

Alarm Logs

Logs can be found…..

Reports…..

Status report…..

Communication Log

Power Failures

New Input Line Status Changes

Historical Input Line Changes

Operator Messages

Alarm Logs

Logins and Passwords can be found…..

Administrative login…..

Security

Meteorological can be found…..

Ambient…..

Set up wind rose levels

293

Frequency Distribution Editor

Wind Rose Levels Editor

Reports…..

Met Reports…..

Joint Frequency Distribution Report

Wind / Pollution Rose

Meteorological Report

Non-continuous Data can be found…..

Configuration Editors…..

Site/Parameter

Data Editors…..

Sample Data Editor

Reports…

Sample Data Report….

Monthly Sample Data Report

Sample Hourly Daily Comparison Report

Sample/Hourly Comparison Graph

Polling can be found…..

Configuration Editors…..

Task Scheduler

Utilities…..

Manual Poll

Status Displays…..

Log Viewer

Task status

Reports……

Internal Reports…

Journal Message Log

Purging data can be found……

Utilities…..

Archive/Purge Data….

Purge Average Data

Configuration Editors….

Task Scheduler

Violation of Standards can be found…..

Configuration Editors…..

Violation of Standards Editor

Reports…..

Violation of Standards

Set up meteorological report

Joint frequency report

Meteorological report

Non-continuous Data can be found….

Setup…..

Set up instrument information

Add or edit offline data …..

Matrix data editor…..

Batch edit data and flags….

Ambient…..

Non-continuous report

Monthly non-continuous summary reports

Monthly non-continuous parameter reports

Polling can be found…..

Editors…..

Schedule tasks

Utilities…..

Manual Poll

Reports…..

Status Reports…..

Communication Log

Purging data can be found…..

Editors……

Batch Editor

Violation of Standards can be found…..

Ambient…..

Set up violation limits

Violation of standards report

294

Wind Speed & Direction can be found…..

Configuration Editors…..

Report Configurations….

Wind Rose Levels Editor

Reports…..

Wind/Pollution Rose

Joint Frequency Distribution

Wind Speed & Direction can be found…..

Ambient…..

Set up wind rose levels

Joint frequency distribution

11.2 AirVision menus compared to AVTrend menus

In AirVision

Under Configuration Editors…..

Site/Parameter

Data Source Details

Server Configuration

In AVTrend

Under Configuration Editors …..

Parameter Settings

Logger Channels

PC Configuration

295

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

12.1

Do not change the security settings for the Admin and Agilaire user name and password, as this can permanently look the user out of the software.

12.2

The AirVision Server service should be set to start automatically, and when it is running it will say started. If the service says it is starting or is blank, then it is not actively running.

12.3

When getting the message ‘ You have saved changes that may require the AirVision services to be restarted. Would you like to restart the AirVision services now?’ go ahead and click Yes to restart the service, or you can manually restart the service if more changes are to be made. If unsure of more changes go ahead and restart the service when the message box appears. This message will appear when changes have been made concerning communications.

12.4

If the AirVision Server service won’t start and gives a message that some services have been stopped, can be due to a couple of different things. Make sure the AirVision Server software is able to access the

296

AVData database. An incomplete or corrupted installation of SQL can also keep the service from starting. Also, if the name of the PC is all numerical characters will keep the service from starting. The

PC name has to have a combination of alpha-numeric characters.

12.5

When logging into the menu it gives error “An unexpected error in this application has been detected.

In order to determine the cause of this error and provide a resolution, Please submit this error report for review and diagnosis”, usually means the AirVision Server service is not started. Start the service and try to log in again, and it should be successful.

12.6

If a user’s Windows login or login permissions change, those settings have to also be changed for the

AirVision Server service in order for the service to start up under the new login.

12.7

When logging into AirVision it gives an error unable to connect to specified server, or the target machine actively refused it; the AirVision Server service is not running. The service will need to be started from under the Windows Control Panel | Administrative Tools | Services.

12.8

Things that can cause the AirVision Server service to not start:

1. If the name of the SQL Server PC is not setup correctly in the Server Settings Editor screen.

2. If the SQL services are not started.

3. If SQL does not allow Windows authentication logon and requires a user name and password, then

SQL authentication will need to be selected in the Server Settings Editor screen, and the user name and password entered in to allow the AirVision PC to log into SQL Server.

4. If the PC is not logged into Windows with an administrative login.

5. If the administrative user and/or password has been changed since the software was installed.

6. If the name of the PC is made up of all numerical characters, when it needs to be alpha numeric.

12.9

When setting up channels in the Site/Parameter screen using the parameter templates, make sure that if the units of the analyzer are not being used, that the field is left blank. Otherwise, the analyzer units will be built to the logger over the basic units set for the parameter itself.

297

12.10

When getting a message that indicates the certain fields have not been filled in and are required even though the fields are filled in, there are three things that can be done to clear the message. First close and reopen the screen that is open. Try entering in and saving the settings again.

If the same message appears, then the second option is to restart the server by selecting Utilities and

Server Restart. Pick the Executive from the list and select Restart Executive Service button on the

Ribbon at the top. Try entering in and saving the settings again.

If the same message appears, then the third option is to close AirVision. Open Services from the

Administrative Tools in the Control Panel, and stop and restart the AirVision service. Once started back up open AirVision again. Try entering in and saving the settings again.

12.11

When getting the information message ‘No Data was found for the specified criteria’, re-query the range of data again for different time frame or smaller time frame. If the message appears again for a time frame that there is definitely existing data, make sure only one site and parameter is selected in the list.

Refresh the screen by clicking the green paper clip beside of the save button on the quick access toolbar at the top left, and re-query for the time frame that the data definitely exists.

12.12

SQL Express and 64 bit XP, Vista, and Windows 7 are not compatible.

12.13

SQL Express 2005 has a 4G file size limit, SQL Express 2008 has a 10G file size limit, and is not ample for running a large size database for AV.

12.14

When using SQL Express the full pc name used in SQL Express has to be used when test the connection to the database after the AV install for the database server.

298

12.15

When running the reports, if the outcome is that there is no data to be displayed it will simply give a message that says no data available and won’t open the form of the report. If you re-run the report where you know there is data but it is still giving the no data available message, this means the report screen is not refreshing. Simply close the report query that is open and reselect it from the Reports menu tree and re-enter in your query selection to run the report and it should open the report form with the data displayed.

12.16

If you run a query selection for a time frame that is too large and causes the query an extended amount of time to retrieve the selection, you can simply open another tab of the same menu item and reselect the query for a smaller time frame then retrieve the selection.

12.17

The blank fields at the top of every column throughout the software are sorting columns, and are meant to be typed in using the names in the column to sort by. The down arrow at the right end of the field is not to be used. For instance, if the site name column was used to sort with the site name could be typed in the field at the top of the column to sort by a specific site name so all of the other sites would be removed from the list.

12.18

When querying a report for more than one parameter for a date range that you know has data, but the report says there is no data to be found; one of the parameters chosen in the query doesn’t have data for the date frame chosen. This will cause the parameters that do have data to not show one the report.

To narrow down which parameter doesn’t have data for the date range requested, run the report for one parameter at a time. The Violation of Standards Report is one of the reports that acts in this manner.

12.19

When deleting a setting from any of the configuration screens, be sure to click the save button after the deletion before proceeding further to avoid receiving error messages.

299

12.20

When running the AIRNow report, it gives an error message that the agency code and/or the country code is required or missing. These two codes are required for the report to run, and are located under the System in the Site/Parameter screen.

12.21

When running the AIRNow report automatically, and the 23 rd

hour is missing; open the Configure Query button on the task in the Scheduler and set the Lookback Days to 1.

12.22

If you change the POC on a parameter that has existing data, it will cause that data to no longer be viewed in the editor and it will appear as if the data is not there. If you run the AQS report on this data it will fill in the value column with ZZ because it can no longer see that data. You cannot import data into the database in the date and time frame of that data because you cannot overwrite existing data, even though you cannot see it and it appears to not be there.

The only way to change the POC on existing data is to create the AQS file with the existing POC, purge the data out of the database, change the POC on the parameter setup, change the POC in the AQS file, then import it back in with the AQS import. Any other historical data still existing in the database with the old POC attached to it will no longer be accessible to be viewed by the software except to see that data does exist and cannot be overwritten.

12.23

If you can link to the logger with the Server Connection box unchecked, but cannot link with the Server

Connection box checked can be caused by not being logged into the PC with an administrative login.

12.24

If the logger’s time changed to daylight savings the poll will be two hours behind on the data it collects.

If you want the poll to be only one hour behind, the sites in the Site/Parameter screen will need the time zones changed to one time zone below the standard zone. For example, if the sites are in the

Eastern Time zone, the zone would need to be changed to Atlantic, but leave the time zone for the PC set to Eastern. This will cause the poll to be only one hour behind and collect the most recent hour of available data. Once the logger’s time goes back to standard time, set the sites time zone back to the original time zone setting.

300

12.25

When direct polling an instrument with AirVision, and the data in the database is off by an hour, and it does it on all instrument polled data; open the File Configuration Editor and find the template being used to parse the instrument data. See if the box for Back Stamp Data Time is checked; if it is, uncheck the box and save the settings. The next round of polled data should show the correct time.

12.26

Help and Support is a new menu option under the Main Navigation menu that has four sub-menu options.

When Agilaire Support is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the Agilaire web site.

When AirVision Manual is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the AirVision manual in pdf form. The pfd can be downloaded.

When Software Release Info is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the Agilaire web site to the page where the Release Notes are listed for the latest version first, then some of the previous versions on down the page.

When Video Tutorials is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the Agilaire web site to the Video Training Resources page where a video for AVTrend is listed first, and individuals videos for different sections of AirVision are listed next, and videos for the 8872 are listed last.

301

Chapter 13: Optional Modules

The optional modules are extra add-ons that are not part of the standard package. Some of the modules are free and simply require a license key from Agilaire to activate them; the rest can be purchased to be incorporated into the standard package.

NOTE: The free modules are listed first starting with Chapter 13.1. The purchased modules are listed second starting with Chapter 13.6.

13.1 Math Editors

The Math Editors are used in conjunction with the Math Equation field in the Parameter Template and

Site/Parameter screens for a central channel calculation only. This add on feature is also discussed in

Chapter 4.4. If the equation is to be used as a global setting it can be set it in the Parameter Template, but if it is going to be used on one parameter only, it can be set on the parameter setup in the

Site/Parameter screen. This setting is to be set after the equation has been configured. To setup math equations or math constants, expand Math from the List Editors menu and single click Math Equation

Editor or Math Constants Editor. The Math Equation Editor tab or Math Constants Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. Each editor is described below.

13.1.1 Math Equations Editor

To add a new equation, select the Add Equation button on the Ribbon at the top. It will create a new entry with an editing box.

To delete an equation, single click the blue square on the left side of the equation name to highlight the row that you want to remove. Select the Delete Equation button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you before simply deleting the current selection.

Equation Name - Type in a name to identify the equation.

Equation Description – Type in a description to help identify the function of the equation.

Math Equation – Type in the formula that is to be used to calculate the value of the selected parameter in the Site/Parameter setup screen. Do not put an equals sign at the end of the formula as it will cause the calculation when ran to give an error and not calculate the value.

302

If there are any flags that are to be ignored from the propagation can be selected by expanding the plus sign beside of the equation row to open an ignore flags box. To setup a flag single click the blue square on the left side of the row with the asterisks then click the down arrow at the right end of the field and pick the flag from the drop down list.

To manually run the calculator, select Manual Parameter Calculator from the Utilities menu. The Math

Parameter Calculator tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection click the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top. Use the Average Data Editor to evaluate the calculated data.

13.1.2 Math Constants Editor

To add a new constant, select the Add Constant button on the Ribbon at the top. It will create a new entry row with an editing box.

To delete a constant, single click the blue square on the left side of the constant name to highlight the row that you want to remove. Select the Delete Constant button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you before simply deleting the current selection.

Constant Name - Type in a name to identify the equation.

Constant Value – Type in the value the constant is to be set to.

Constant Description – Type in a description to help identify the function of the constant.

303

13.1.3 Math Parameter Calculator

To manually run the math equations or math constants, select Math Parameter Calculator from the

Utilities menu. To run all configured equations for a site, select the site tab and enter in the query, then select the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top.

To run specific parameter calculations, select the Parameter Calculation tab and enter in the query, then select the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top.

13.1.4 Task Scheduler

To run the math equations automatically, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Calculate Math Parameters Task.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

304

When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task

Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the

Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.

Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.

Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you want to handle running the task.

Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The default is the current date and time that you create the task.

Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the task is to run.

Task Details Section

General Tab

Basic Task Information section

Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list, which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection section at the top unless given a different name by the user.

Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.

Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.

This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled

Task Selection section at the top.

Calculation Options section

Site - Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the site the calculation is to be performed on. A separate task will have to be configured for each site that a calculation is to be ran for.

Interval - Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the data type the calculation is to be performed on.

305

Advanced Tab

Retry Options section

Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.

Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.

Status Logging section

Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.

Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom, and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.

Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.

Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.

306

13.2 Calibration Adjust Tool

This add on feature is also discussed in Chapter 6.8.

Before the Cal Adjust Tool can function the level of the phase has to be set in the calibration setup in the

Data Source Details screen.

Level – Applies to those who have the Calibration Adjust Tool to identify the calibration levels, such as zero, span, or precision, regardless of how they are named. This field is also used to allow the Precision phase of a cal to be identified and reported on the AQS report when the Cal

Precision Data Records box is selected on the report query. Click the down arrow and select from the dropdown list, ZERO, SPAN, PREC, 20%, 40%, 60%, or 80%. Level is also discussed in the calibration setup in Chapter 4.6.4.

To open the adjustment tool, single click Calibration Adjust Tool from the Data Editors menu. The

Calibration Adjust Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To see if a calibration needs to be adjusted, select the parameter and average interval affected by the calibration and the date range the calibration ran, then select the Analyze button on the Ribbon at the top.

The Adjust for Span button is deselected by default so the adjustment will only do a zero correction. If you want the adjustment to do a span correction, then select the Adjust for Span button.

If the adjustment is to do a span correction as well the Adjust for Span button is selected. You may optionally select the Sliding Scale button to have the slope factor linearly interpolated between each calibration. For example: if the slope correction on the first calibration is 1.1 and the slope correction on the second calibration is 1.05, then the hourly data at the midpoint would have a slope correction of

1.075, with the hour closest to the first calibration being 1.1 and the hour closest to the second calibration being 1.05. This button is selected by default.

If the Apply Forward button is selected the calibration corrections are applied using the calibration results going forward in time. If Apply Forward is deselected the corrections are applied going backwards from each calibration. This button is selected by default.

Once the configuration of buttons has been chosen, select the Analyze button to view the data. If the data is correct select the Apply button on the Ribbon at the top to make the changes. Any data such as

307

hourly, that is changed will be marked with the z flag to show the calibration was adjusted, and the hourly data is locked from the calibration being adjusted a second time. If the data needs to be returned to its original form, a batch edit can be performed in the Average Data Editor.

13.2.1 Task Scheduler

To run the cal adjust automatically, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Calibration Adjust Task.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task

Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the

Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.

Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.

Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you want to handle running the task.

Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The default is the current date and time that you create the task.

Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the task is to run.

308

Task Details Section

General Tab

Basic Task Information section

Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list, which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection section at the top unless given a different name by the user.

Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.

Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.

This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled

Task Selection section at the top.

Calibration Adjust Options section

Interval to Adjust – Click the down arrow and select the type of data that is to be adjusted.

Forward Adjust – If selected the calibration corrections are applied using the calibration results going forward in time. If Forward Adjust is deselected the corrections are applied going backwards from each calibration.

Span Adjust – If selected the span will be corrected in addition to the zero correction.

Sliding Adjust - If selected to have the slope factor linearly interpolated between each calibration.

Advanced Tab

Retry Options section

Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.

Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.

309

Status Logging section

Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.

Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom, and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.

Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.

Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.

310

13.3 Data Average Tag Rollup Editor

The Average Tag Rollup Editor allows smaller data interval type be used to create a larger data interval type, such as using minute data to create hourly data.

The setup screen is to select the type of data to roll up into a larger interval type, and select the site and parameter that is to be affected by the roll up. To actually execute this action the roll up task has to be scheduled in the scheduler.

To setup the rollup editor, single click Data Average Rollup Configuration from the Configuration Editors menu. The Data Average Rollup Configuration tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add a new rollup task, single click the asterisks in the blue square on the left side of the blank row.

Each field has a drop down arrow at the right end of the field. Click each down arrow to select from the drop down lists in each field.

To delete an existing rollup task, single click the blue square on the left side of the task to highlight the row you want to remove. Press the Delete key on the keyboard and it will prompt you to choose Yes to delete or No to exit.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the File Import Configuration, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Rollup Method – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list which method to use for rolling up the smaller data interval to the larger data interval. There are four methods to choose from:

Minute to Hour – where the inputs are rounded, and the minute data has to have 75% valid.

5 Minute to Hour – where the inputs are rounded , and the 5 minute data has to have 75% valid.

Hour to Daily – where the inputs are rounded, and the hourly data has to have 75% valid.

Hourly to 8-Hour Rolling – where the inputs are rounded, and the hourly data has to have 75% valid.

Hourly to 8-Hour Rolling, Truncated – where the inputs are truncated, and the hourly data has to have

75% valid.

Hourly to 24-Hour Rolling – where the inputs are rounded, and the hourly data has to have 75% valid.

Input Tag – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list site, parameter, and the interval type the data will be rolled up from.

Output Tag - Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list the site, parameter and the interval type the data will be written to.

311

13.3.1 Task Scheduler

To add a new rollup task, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Average Rollup Task.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task

Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the

Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.

Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.

Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you want to handle running the task.

Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The default is the current date and time that you create the task.

Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the task is to run.

Task Details Section

General Tab

Basic Task Information section

Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list, which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection section at the top unless given a different name by the user.

Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.

Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.

This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled

Task Selection section at the top.

312

Rollup Type – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list which Rollup method to run.

Tag - Select the asterisks in the blue square at the left end of the blank row.

Click the

drop down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list the site, parameter, and interval the data will be written to.

Advanced Tab

Retry Options section

Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.

Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.

Status Logging section

Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.

Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom, and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.

Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.

Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.

313

13.3.2 Manual Average Data Rollup

To run a manual data rollup, single click Manual Average Data Rollup from the Utilities menu. The

Manual Average Data Rollup tab will open on the right side of the screen.

Rollup Type – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list which method to use for rolling up the smaller data interval to the larger data interval.

Date Range – Enter in start and end date range of the data that is stored in the logger that you want to retrieve. The default is the current days date and time when you open the manual poll screen.

Parameter Tag Selection - Select the asterisks in the blue square at the left end of the blank row.

Click

the

drop down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list the site, parameter, and interval the data will be written to.

314

13.4 Sync

Sync allows AirVision to automatically sync with other AirVision pc’s or with AV-Trend pc’s in the field.

This synchronization capability provides the option to synchronize data and configuration tables.

Important: A broadband connection is required as dial up modems are too slow to support synchronization. The AirVision Server pc must also have Microsoft Sync Framework loaded, however, only the Synchronization Tools and the Database Providers need to be installed, which can be downloaded from Microsoft’s web site. Be sure to install the proper version, either 32 bit or 64 bit, for your version of SQL Server. The versions of AirVision and AV-Trend must be the same.

Important: For the site pc’s running AV-Trend; TCP/IP protocol must be enabled using the SQL

Configuration Tool, SQL Server must be configured to allow Remote Connections, the sa account must be enabled under Security and the correct password must be set in the connection string, and the firewall should allow ports 1433 and 1434 to be open on the AV-Trend pc, router and intervening firewalls.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the sync editor, select the disk icon on the Quick

Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

A TCP route will need to be created in the Server Configuration screen to the site pc. As a phone line and modem cannot be used with the Sync module. Steps for setting up a TCP route can be found in Chapter

4 section 4.13.2.d.

13.4.1 Sync Connection Editor

To setup the connection editor, expand Sync from the Configuration Editors menu, and single click Sync

Connection Editor. The Sync Connection Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add a new connection entry, single click the blue square at the bottom left with the asterisks and it will highlight the row. The row has three fields that are to be completed at the bottom of the screen.

Once the settings are saved the connection entry will appear at the top.

Connection Properties section

Connection Name – Type in the field a name to describe the connection string.

Connection Type – Click the down arrow and select Sql Server Direct Connection.

Database Server – This is the name of the PC where SQL is installed.

Instance – This field will likely automatically fill in, but if not, it should be the type of SQL that is installed; such as the example is SQLEXPRESS.

Database – This is the name of the database, which defaults to AVData unless it was changed when the database was originally created.

315

Security section – The Database Server Name or IP Address field should be filled in with the name of the remote server or the IP address where SQL is installed at the site. Uncheck the Windows Security box and enter in the sa user name and password for SQL. Click the Test Connection button to see if the database can be seen by the central.

13.4.2 Sync Contract Editor

To setup the contract editor, expand Sync from the Configuration Editors menu, and single click Sync

Contract Editor. The Sync Contract Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add a new contract, select the New button on the Ribbon at the top. It will add a new row in the

Selected Sync Contract section at the top.

Selected Sync Editor section

Contract Name – Type in a name to describe the contract for the site.

Sync Direction – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the direction in which the data will be traveling between the central and the site.

Sync Scope – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list if data or configuration will be transferred. Download is transferring from the site to the central. Upload is transferring from central to the site.

Remote Sync Connection – Click the down arrow and select from the list the needed connection that was created in the Sync Connection Editor.

Reading Look Back Day Limit – Click in the field and type in the number of days for the sync process to look back for data.

Most Recent Contract Modification – This field will automatically fill in with the current days date and time once the entry has been saved.

316

Contract Needs Provisioning – This field will automatically fill in once the entry has been saved.

If the remote database gets replaced with a blank database, AirVision will not automatically reprovision. A new provision will need to be performed as it was originally in order for it to recreate the configuration and tables.

Site Restriction Filter section

Included Sites - Click the blue button at the bottom left with the asterisks and it will highlight the field. At the right end of the field click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which site the contract is for, then click in the white area of the section to the right, or press

Enter on the keyboard to propagate the entry up to the bottom of the list.

Average Interval Restriction Filter section

Included Average Intervals - Click the blue button at the bottom left with the asterisks and it will highlight the field. At the right end of the field click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the data interval type(s) that is to be transferred, then click in the white area of the section to the left, or press Enter on the keyboard to propagate the entry up to the bottom of the list.

13.4.3 Database Sync

To setup the database sync, expand Sync from the Utilities menu, and single click Database Sync. The

Database Sync tab will open on the right side of the screen.

Under the Selected Contract section, select the contract that is to be used. It will show in each column the information that was created in the previous sync setup screens.

Select the Execute Contract Sync button on the Ribbon at the top, and it will process the information then give the TimeStamp and Event Description under the Processing Information section.

317

13.4.4 Task Scheduler

To add a new rollup task, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Database Sync Task.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task

Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the

Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.

Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.

Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you want to handle running the task.

Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The default is the current date and time that you create the task.

Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the task is to run.

Task Details Section

General Tab

Basic Task Information section

318

Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list, which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection section at the top unless given a different name by the user.

Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.

Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.

This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled

Task Selection section at the top.

Sync Contract – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the sync contract that is to be scheduled to run.

Advanced Tab

Retry Options section

Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.

Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.

Status Logging section

Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.

Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom, and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.

Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.

Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.

319

13.4.5 Sync Configuration Wizard

To setup the Sync using the wizard, expand Sync from the Configuration Editors menu, and single click

Sync Configuration Wizard. The wizard will open in a new window, click Next to continue.

Select the Remote Node for the remote PC that the sync is being configured to talk to.

320

Select Create a new Sync Connection is this is the first connection to be created.

The Database Server Name or IP Address field should be filled in with the name of the remote server or the IP address where SQL is installed at the site. Once this is done it will fill the name in the Connection

Name field at the bottom. Uncheck the Windows Security box and enter in the sa user name and password for SQL. Click the Test Connection button to see if the database can be seen by the wizard. If it has a successful connection click Next to continue.

The Sync Contract Names will automatically fill in with the Name that was provided in the previous screen, but can be changed in these two fields if needed. Click Next to continue.

321

In the Site Restruction Filter section select all sites or specific sites. In the Interval Restriction Filter select all data interval types or specific intervals. Click Next to contine.

Click Next to continue setting up and saving the connection.

322

If you choose to launch the Sync Database screen, check the box at the bottom of the Completing the wizard screen and click Finish.

323

13.5 Status Displays

13.5.1 Realtime Data Trending

To setup the realtime graph, single click Realtime Data Trending from the Status Displays menu. The

Realtime Data Trending tab will open on the right side of the screen.

Select from the query the Site and Parameter, the Average Interval data type, and the Number of Hours for the graph to look back to retrieve data. Use Dynamic Scaling and Suppress Reading Flag colors can be selected if needed to change the graphs scale or to keep the data as one color on the graph.

The data can be retrieved by selecting the Manual Refresh button on the Ribbon at the top, or as long as the trending screen remains open the Auto Refresh button can be selected and the software will automatically update the graph after the poll runs.

The graph is shown on the left side of the screen while the same data is also shown in column form on the right side of the screen.

Select the Open Selection in Data Editor button on the Ribbon at the top to bring this same data selection up in the Average Data Editor.

324

The graph or chart can be show separate by selecting or deselecting the Show Grid and Show Chart

buttons on the Ribbon at the top.

13.5.2 Realtime Tabular Display

To setup the realtime display, single click Realtime Tabular Dispaly from the Status Displays menu. The

Realtime Tabular Display tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add a new display, select the Select Display Elements button on the Ribbon at the top. It will open the Realtime Element Selection Wizard. Click Next to continue to the next screen.

Select the Site(s), Parameter(s), and Time Interval data type(s) that is to be displayed and click Next.

325

Select the Site(s) and Parameter(s) for the instantaneous data that is to be displayed and click Next.

If a digital input line(s) is to also be displayed that may be triggering the parameter select the digital input by checking the box beside of the specific digital input and click Next.

326

The Refresh Interval defaults to 30 seconds but can be changed. The appearance for the Default

Element Style defaults to Deep File but can be changed by clicking the down arrow on the right side of the field and selecting from the drop down list one of the other element options. It will show in the

Example box below the field selection what the element choice looks like. Click Next.

When all selection choices have been made click Finish to complete the setup of the display.

327

The display(s) will open with the selections that have been created.

Select the Save Current Layout button on the Ribbon at the top to save the display so that it can be opened again at a later time if the display gets closed.

To open a previously created display, select the Load Display Layout button on the Ribbon at the top.

328

13.6 File Import Configuration

The File Import Configuration works in conjunction with the File Import Tool, which is an optional added feature that has to be purchased in addition to the AirVision software to get these two features.

To setup the import configuration, single click File Import Configuration from the Configuration Editors menu. The File Import Configuration tab will open on the right side of the screen. As import templates are added they will appear in the Template Name column on the left of the setup screen.

To add a new template, select the Add Template button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields in each section on the right side of the screen, which are described below.

To open an existing template, single click on the template name listed in the Template Name column to bring up the template settings.

To delete an existing template, single click the template name in the Template Name column you want to remove. Select the Delete Template button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the template is immediately removed from the list.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the File Import Configuration, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

File Schema section

Template Name – Enter in the name that you want this template to be referred to. This is the name that will show in the Template Name column on the left.

File Layout section

Number of Header Rows – Use the radio buttons to select the number of header rows that will be at the top of the file you are importing. This is the number of rows at the top of the file the import tool should ignore as not being data.

Number of Footer Rows – Use the radio buttons to select the number of footer rows that will be at the bottom of the file you are importing. This is the number of rows at the bottom of the file the import tool should ignore as not being data.

Minimum Number of Columns – By default this field is blank. Use the radio buttons to select the number of columns that will be in the file you are importing. If this field is set, incoming lines with fewer columns are skipped and a warning is logged. Incoming lines with at least that number of columns will be attempted.

Field Delimiter – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list what delimiter is used to separate the data in the file.

329

Sample Type – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the type that applies to where the file is being retrieved from. Standard is usually the most common type used. If

SampleIdKey is selected, the rest of the fields have to be setup as such: Match Parameters From

Row, Overwrite Existing Data, Particulate Sample, and the Data field column set to Sample

Identifier.

Back Stamp Data Time - Click to check the box if the data is to be backed up by one interval.

Example: If the file gives hourly data as 01:00 it will back it up to 00:00.

Parameter Information section

Parameter Matching – Select either Match the Parameter by Column Number, Match

Parameters from Row, or Match Parameters from Header.

Overwrite Existing Data – Click to check the box if you want to overwrite the existing data. If the box is not checked the import will skip data points where data already exists in the database.

Parameter Data Type – Click the dot beside of the type of data that you are importing. Most data formats will be Average (Continuous), unless it is 24 hour data or particulate matter.

Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the type of data from the drop down list.

Example – 001h would be for hourly data.

File Column Mapping section – To setup the mapping for the columns of the file you are importing click the Add Column Mapping button. This will turn on columns to be filled in.

Depending on what you enter in the first two columns will depend if the last two columns are required.

Column Number – Fill in this column with the column number where the option chosen in the Data Field will be located. Example: if the Date/Time is located in the second column in the data file, then a 2 would be put in the Column Number field.

Data Field - Click the down arrow and select the drop down list what represents the column number you entered in the first field. The options are AQS Method Code, AQS

Null Code, Date, Date/Time, Flags, Qualifier Code, Time, and Value.

Parameter Template – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which parameter template represents the type of data you are importing.

Parse Format – Depending on which option you selected in the second field will depend on what the parse format is. For example, if you selected Date in the second field the parse format would give option to choose from as to the format of the date in the file you are importing. The Parse Format is available when Date, Date /Time, or Time is selected for the Data Type. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which format represents the Data Type you selected for the file you are importing.

330

Flag Map - This option is only available when Flags is selected for the Data Type. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which flag represents the parameter you selected for the file you are importing.

331

13.7 File Import Tool

The File Import Tool works in conjunction with the File Import Configuration, which is an optional added feature that has to be purchased in addition to the AirVision software to get these two features. A file must have a template created for it in the File Import Configuration editor before it can be imported with the Import Tool.

To run the Import Tool, single click File Import Tool from the Utilities menu. The File Import Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen.

General section

Template – Click the down arrow and select a template that was created in the import configuration, from the drop down list.

Site – Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop down list that the data is to be imported into.

Select File – Click the Browse button at the end of the field. This will open a Select File box where you can change directories and select the file that you are wanting to import.

Import File button – Once you have selected the file you want to import, click the Import File button. The results of the import will be displayed in the field below the button.

Cancel button – To import another file click the Cancel button at the bottom to clear the fields to allow you to make a new selection.

332

13.8 Instrument Polling Setup

13.8.1 Server Configuration Screen

To setup the server configuration, single click Server Configuration from the Configuration Editors menu.

The Server Configuration tab will open on the right side of the screen. This tab has a tree menu that expands the System’s Executive (the pc name) and the communication routes once they have been created.

Setting up the Executive

Single click the executive under the System in the tree menu and select Configure Executive button on the Ribbon at the top. The New Executive Options box will open with all of the selections checked; clicked the OK button.

Executive tab

General tab

Executive Information section

Executive Name – The default is the pc’s name.

Executive Description – The default is Executive on the pc listed in the Executive Name field, unless it is a new entry then this field will be blank.

Network Address – The default is the pc’s name.

Network Protocol – The default is TCP and should remain at the default. The other option is HTTP and is a place holder in the software for possible future development.

Port – This port is what the client software uses to communicate with the server software whether they are both installed on the same pc or on separate pcs. The default is 9885 and although the field allows you to change the port number it needs to remain at the default setting in order for the client and server to communicate.

333

Select the Service Components tab and make sure the Plugin entry File Import Service is enabled and auto start is enabled. Select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the settings before exiting this screen.

Setting up a TCP Route

To add a TCP connection, single click the Executive under the System in the tree menu and select the

Add TCP Route button on the Ribbon at the top. The TCP tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing TCP route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes, and double-click on the TCP route you want to open on the right side of the screen.

To delete an existing TCP route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes, and single click the TCP route you want to delete, then select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the TCP route or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the TCP route.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

TCP tab

TCP Connection Details section

Route Name – Enter in the name you want to give the route name.

Enabled – Check the box to enable the TCP connection for use.

Network Address – Enter in the required IP address.

334

Polling port – The default is 9881, and is required by the logger as it is part of the loggers code.

Although the field allows you to change the port number, it needs to remain at the default setting in order for the logger to communicate with the automatic or manual polling.

Emulation Port - The default is 9887, and is required by the logger as it is part of the loggers code. Although the field allows you to change the port number, it needs to remain at the default setting in order for the logger to communicate through the link to logger function.

Read Timeout – The timeout used when trying to read the response before it deems the response empty and gives up. If the field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds.

Recommendation is to leave the field blank.

Write Timeout – The amount of time to allow for sending (writing) data to the device. If the field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds. Recommendation is to leave the field blank.

Disconnect After – The amount of time that should pass before disconnecting in the event that the communication connection has timed out.

Setting up Import Service

The Import service works in conjunction with the direct polling of an instrument, which is an optional module that does not come with the standard software package and has to be purchased in addition to the standard software package.

To add an import service, double click Import Service on the left in the tree menu. The Import Service tab will open on the right side of the screen. Then select the Source Mapping button at the bottom and it will put a blank row on the right side of the screen with blank fields that are explained below.

To open the existing import service, expand the Executive and Service Configuration, and double-click on the import service. The Import Service tab will open on the right side of the screen. Select the row you want to make changes to by clicking in the blue box on the left side of the row to highlight it.

Import Service

Import Service tab

Folder Root (leave null for default): - This is the root folder the import service watches. Any source mappings with relative folder paths will be rooted here. By default it is empty, which

335

means it will use the default of C:\AVServerData\DataFiles. Each mapping entry maps a source to a file import template, and specifies which folder and what types of files to watch for. If the folder path is empty, then the service looks under the <RootFolder>\<SourceName> folder for files. If the folder path is an absolute path (e.g. C:\test\data), then the root folder doesn't affect it. If the folder path is a relative path (e.g. test\data), then the service looks under

<RootFolder>\test\data for the files.

Source – The source or device the import is coming from.

Import Template – The format of the file being imported.

Filename Pattern – The filename pattern can be *.*, or something more specific like *.rsp, or even more specific than that, like "SITE1LABDATA*.csv", etc . Leaving the field blank is the same as typing in *.*. This is the same as using the command prompt and doing a "dir for a type of file.

Folder Path – This field should remain blank unless you are polling data straight from an instrument and running into errors. Have the data dropped into a folder and configure the source mapping to have the import to look in that folder so it can import the data.

13.8.2 Data Source Details Screen

To add a new instrument, open Data source Details and single click the Site name in the tree menu, then select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top, and select Instrument. A new Instrument tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To open an existing instrument, expand the System and Site, and double-click the instrument name to open the Instrument Name tab.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Source tab

Source Information section

Site – Defaults to the name of the site the instrument is being created for and is grayed out to indicate that it cannot be changed.

336

Source Name – Enter in a name that identifies the instrument.

Enabled – Click to check the box if this instrument is to be used.

Description – Enter in a description for the instrument or for what it is used for. This is not a required field and can be left blank.

Retry Attempts – The number of times communication will be attempted in the case of communication issues. The default is 3.

Instrument Details section

Instrument Type – Click the down arrow and select an instrument name from the drop down list.

Instrument Identifier – Enter in the identifier number for the instrument.

Instrument Password – Enter in the password for the instrument if it requires one for communication.

Communication tab

Communication Routes

Create New Route button – Click the Create New Route button to add the route. This will open a new screen where you select the server by clicking the down arrow and selecting the Executive name from the list. Select if the connection will be made by TCP,

Modem, or serial (which is considered direct connection). Click the OK button to save the settings.

Route – Shows the communication option and executive name that was chosen when the route was created.

Priority – If you only have one communication route the priority should be set to 1. If you have more than one communication route setup for a site, then the priority has to be set in order of which route is to be used first to communicate with the site.

Polling – Check this box if the communication route selected is to poll the site. If you have only one route to communicate with the site then this box will need to be checked.

337

Emulation – Check this box if the communication route selected is to be able to link to logger. If you have only one route to communicate with the site then this box will need to be checked.

Init Command – This field is only used for sites with T switch or switch boxes. If a switch box is used at a site that needs a command to know how to set the switches, enter in the command that is to be used. The command will be sent after the modem opens the connection.

Final Command – This field is only used to sites with T switch or switch boxes.

Enter in the command that is needed to tell the switch the string is finished.

The command will be sent before the connection disconnects.

13.8.3 Flag Mapping Editor

To setup the flag mapping, single click Flag Mapping Editor from the Configuration Editors menu. The

Flag Mapping Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add a new flag, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put a blank row at the bottom of the list.

To view an existing flag, single click the flag name listed in the Flag Map Name column and it will show the settings in the bottom portion of the screen.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Flag Mapping Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Flag Mappings section

Flag Map Name column – Type in the name chosen for the flag.

Mapping Type - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the type of mapping.

Choose from Binary, DecBinary, Hex, and String.

Description – Type in the reference that describes the use of the flag.

Flags section

Incoming Bit Number – Type in the number of bits if any, type in 0 if none.

338

Map to Reading Flag – Click the down arrow and select the flag from the drop down list.

Inhibit Flag – Check this box if this flag is to be an inhibitor.

Test Absence Of Flag – Check this box if the absence of the flag is to be tested.

Annotation Text – Type in an annotation if one is needed as a description.

13.8.4 File Import Configuration Screen

To setup the import configuration, single click File Import Configuration from the Configuration Editors menu. The File Import Configuration tab on the right side of the screen. As import templates are added they will appear in the Template Name column on the left of the setup screen.

To add a new template, select the Add Template button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields in each section on the right side of the screen, which are described below.

To open an existing template, single click the template name listed in the Template Name column to open the template settings.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the File Import Configuration, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

File Schema section

Template Name – Enter in the name that you want this template to be referred to. This is the name that will show in the Template Name column on the left.

File Layout section

Number of Header Rows – Use the radio buttons to select the number of header rows that will be at the top of the file you are importing. This is the number of rows at the top of the file the import tool should ignore as not being data.

339

Number of Footer Rows – Use the radio buttons to select the number of footer rows that will be at the bottom of the file you are importing. This is the number of rows at the bottom of the file the import tool should ignore as not being data.

Maximum Number of Columns – Use the radio buttons to select the number of columns that will be in the file you are importing.

Field Delimiter – Click the down arrow and select comma or pipe delimited from the drop down list.

Sample Type – Click the down arrow and always select standard from the drop down list.

Parameter Information section

Parameter Matching – Select either Match the Parameter by Column Number or Match

Parameters from Header.

Overwrite existing data – Click to check the box if you want to overwrite the existing data. If the box is not checked the import will skip data points where data already exists in the database.

Parameter Data Type – Click the dot beside of the type of data that you are importing. Most data formats will be Average (Continuous), unless it is 24 hour data or particulate matter.

Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the type of data from the drop down list.

Example – 001h would be for hourly data.

File Column Mapping section – To setup the mapping for the columns of the file you are importing click the Add Column Mapping button. This will turn on columns to be filled in.

Depending on what you enter in the first two columns will depend if the last two columns are required.

Column Number – Enter in the number of the column where the import is to start reading in the file from.

Data Type - Click the down arrow and select the drop down list what represents the column number you entered in the first field. The options are Date, Date and Time,

Floating Point, and Time.

Parameter Template – This option is only available when Floating Point is selected for the Data Type. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which parameter template represents the type of data you are importing.

Parse Format – Depending on which option you selected in the second field will depend on what the parse format is. For example, if you selected Date in the second field the parse format would give option to choose from as to the format of the date in the file you are importing. The Parse Format is available when Date, Date and Time, or Time is

340

selected for the Data Type. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which format represents the Data Type you selected for the file you are importing.

13.8.5 File Import Tool

The File Import Tool works in conjunction with the File Import Configuration, which is an optional added feature that has to be purchased in addition to the AirVision software to get these two features. A file must have a template created for it in the File Import Configuration editor before it can be imported with the Import Tool.

To run the Import Tool, single click File Import Tool from the Utilities menu. The File Import Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen.

General section

Template – Click the down arrow and select a template that was created in the import configuration, from the drop down list.

Site – Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop down list that the data is to be imported into.

Select File – Click the Browse button at the end of the field. This will open a Select File box where you can change directories and select the file that you are wanting to import.

Import File button – Once you have selected the file you want to import, click the Import File button. The results of the import will be displayed in the field below the button.

Cancel button – To import another file click the Cancel button at the bottom to clear the fields to allow you to make a new selection.

341

13.8.6 Task Scheduler

To add a new Instrument Poll Task, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Instrument Poll Task.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task

Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the

Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.

Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.

Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you want to handle running the task.

Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The default is the current date and time that you create the task.

Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the task is to run.

Task Details Section

General Tab

Basic Task Information section

Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list, which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection section at the top unless given a different name by the user.

342

Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.

Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.

This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled

Task Selection section at the top.

Instrument Polling Options

Instrument -

Click the

drop down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list the instrument that is to be polled.

Instrument Poll Type -

Click the

drop down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list the data average interval that is to be collected.

File Import Template: (Overrides Default for Command) -

Click the

drop down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list the instrument driver that is to be used for the particular instrument.

Advanced Tab

Retry Options section

Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.

Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.

Status Logging section

Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.

Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom, and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.

Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.

343

Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.

13.8.7 Manual Instrument Poll

To run a manual instrument poll, single click Manual Instrument Poll from the Utilities menu. The

Manual Instrument Poll tab will open on the right side of the screen. Each section allows you to select what data you want to retrieve.

Site and Source Name – Select the site and source that you want to poll from by clicking the blue square to the left side of the name to highlight the row.

Poll Type – Select the type of data you want to retrieve. To select more than one type hold down the

Control key while clicking on the poll types needing to be polled.

Date Range – Enter in start and end date range of the data that is stored in the instrument that you want to retrieve. The default is the current days date and time when you open the manual poll screen.

To manual poll the selected types from the instrument, select the Start Manual Poll button on the

Ribbon at the top.

To abort the manual poll before it has finished retrieving the data, select the Cancel button on the

Ribbon at the top.

The Show Log Viewer and Scroll With Messages buttons are selected by default so the log will appear at the bottom of the screen to show the results of the download. If you do not want to view the log you can deselect the buttons on the Ribbon at the top.

To clear the results sent back from the instrument from the screen, select the Clear Results button on the Ribbon at the top.

Time Initiated – The time the poll started to contact the instrument.

Device – The logger or instrument the poll is connected to.

Type – The type of data the poll is asking for.

Item Information – This shows the command string being sent and received.

344

Status - Shows the result sent back from the instrument, if it was good, successful, or failed with errors.

345

13.9 PARS

The Precision and Accuracy tests are ran outside of the software. The information from those tests have to be hand entered into the PARS editor by the user. The Precision and Accuracy data records can also be selected to be outputted on the AQS XML report.

To open the precision editor, expand PARS from the Data Editors menu, and single click Precision Test

Editor. The Precision Test Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To open the accuracy editor, expand PARS from the Data Editors menu, and single click Accuracy Test

Editor. The Accuracy Test Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add new test information to either editor, select the New Test button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields in each section on the right side of the screen, which are described below.

To open an existing test in either editor, single click the blue square on the left side of the site and parameter to highlight the row listed in the Parameter column in the Test Selection section. As you select a site and parameter the fields in the other four sections will change to reveal the settings for that parameter.

To delete an existing test from either editor, single click the blue square on the left side of the site and parameter to highlight the row listed in the Parameter column in the Test Selection section that you want to remove. Select the Delete Test button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the template is immediately removed from the list.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the PARS Editors, select the disk icon on the Quick

Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

13.9.1 Precision Test Editor

A precision test is a phase in a calibration for the air flow. Entering test information into the editor starts with the Precision Test Information section.

Precision Test Information section

Precision Check Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Precision Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Precision Sample Identifier and Precision Type Identifier – These two fields are meant to be comment fields.

346

Audit Agency Code – Enter in the audit code that has been assigned to your agency.

Enable AQS Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be included on the AQS XML report.

Monitor Information section

Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a parameter drop down a list of parameters and their information.

Duration Code - Click the down arrow and select the length of the test from the drop down list.

Actual Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor.

Parameter Type, Unit Code, POC, State Code, County/Tribal Code, and Site Code – If the parameter that you selected in the above parameter field, has been setup in the Parameter

Template Editor, all of these fields will be automatically filled in as they are propagated over from the parameter’s template.

Once those fields are filled in the Precision Test Selection fields will automatically be filled in.

Collocated Monitor section

Parameter - Click down arrow and select a parameter from the drop down list.

POC – If the parameter you selected has been setup in the Parameter Template Editor this field will be automatically filled in as it is propagated from the parameter’s template.

Indicated Method Code – Enter in the method code of a comparison monitor.

Test Results section

Actual Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

Indicated Value – Enter in the value that you were expecting to get from the test.

347

13.9.2 Accuracy Test Editor

Accuracy Test Information section

Accuracy Date – Click the down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Accuracy Audit Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Accuracy Type - Click the down arrow and select the type of accuracy test that was ran from the drop down list.

Local Primary Standard - Click the down arrow and select which standard applies to the test that was ran from the drop down list.

Local Standard Expiration Date - Click down arrow and select the date the standard expires from the drop down calendar.

Audit Sample Identifier - This field is meant to be a comment field.

Audit Scheduled Date - Click down arrow and select the audit date from the drop down calendar.

Audit Class - Click the down arrow and select the audit class from the drop down list.

Audit Type - Click the down arrow and select the audit type from the drop down list.

Enable AQS Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be included on the AQS XML report.

348

Monitor Information section

All of the fields under the Monitor Information section are setup in the same manner as the fields under the Monitor Information section for the Precision Test.

Once those fields are filled in the Accuracy Test Selection fields will be automatically filled in

Test Results section

Actual Value and Indicated Value – These fields are setup in the same manner as the fields for the Precision Test.

Zero Span Value - Enter in the needed value.

349

13.10 PARS Reports

13.10.1 Accuracy Report

To run the accuracy report, expand PARS Reports from the Reports menu, and single click Accuracy

Report. The Accuracy Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Accuracy Test Editor in a report format. Each site and parameter is shown separately per page. Examples of the reports are shown below.

350

13.10.2 Precision Report

To run the precision report, expand the PARS Reports from the Reports menu, and single click Precision

Report. The Precision Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Precision Test Editor in a report format. Each site and parameter is shown separately per page. Examples of the reports are shown below.

351

13.11 Monitor Assessment

The Monitor Assessment tests are ran outside of the software. The information from those tests have to be hand entered into the Monitor Assessment editor by the user. The Monitor Assessment data records can also be selected to be outputted on the AQS 3.0 XML report.

To open each assessment editor, expand Monitor Assessment from the Data Editors menu, and single click the editor’s name. The editor’s tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add new test information to each editor, select the Add Assessment button on the Ribbon at the top.

It will put blank fields in each section on the right side of the screen, which are described below.

To open an existing test in each editor, single click the blue square on the left side of the site and parameter to highlight the row listed in the Parameter column in the Test Selection section. As you select a site and parameter, the fields in the other three sections will change to reveal the settings for that parameter.

To delete an existing test from each editor, single click the blue square on the left side of the site and parameter to highlight the row listed in the Parameter column in the Test Selection section that you want to remove. Select the Delete Assessment button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the template is immediately removed from the list.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the editors, select the disk icon on the Quick

Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.

13.11.1 Annual Performance Evaluation

Assessment Details section

Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down

List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the

Site/Parameter screen.

Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.

Monitor Information section

Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

352

Monitor Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Recorded Values section

Monitor Concentration – Enter in the value(s) that was the result of the test.

Assessment Concentration – Enter in the value(s) that was the result of the test.

353

13.11.2 Duplicate Assessment Details

Assessment Details section

Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down

List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the

Site/Parameter screen.

Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.

Monitor Information section

Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

Monitor Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Recorded Values section - Enter in the value(s) that was the result of the test.

354

13.11.3 Field Proficiency Test Details

Assessment Details section

Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down

List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the

Site/Parameter screen.

Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.

Monitor Information section

Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

Monitor Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Recorded Values section

Monitor Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

Assessment Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

355

13.11.4 Flow Rate Coarse Details

Assessment Details section

Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down

List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the

Site/Parameter screen.

Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.

PM10 Monitor Information section

PM10 Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

PM10 Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Flow Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

PM2.5 Monitor Information section

PM2.5 Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

PM2.5 Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Assessment Results section

Monitor Flow Rate – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

Assessment Flow Rate – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

356

357

13.11.5 Flow Rate Verification Details

Assessment Details section

Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down

List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the

Site/Parameter screen.

Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.

Monitor Information section

Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Recorded Values section

Monitor Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

Assessment Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

358

13.11.6 National Performance Audit

Assessment Details section

Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down

List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the

Site/Parameter screen.

Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.

NPAP Assessment Details section

NPAP Assessment Type – Click the down arrow and select BOA (Back of the Analyzer ) or TTP

(Through the Sampling Inlet or Probe ) from the drop down list.

NPAP Method Code – Enter in the method code of the NPAP.

Monitor Information section

Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

Monitor Method Code - Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Recorded Values section

Monitor Concentration – Enter in the value(s) that was the result of the test.

Assessment Concentration – Enter in the value(s) that was the result of the test.

359

360

13.11.7 One Point Quality Control

Assessment Details section

Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down

List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the

Site/Parameter screen.

Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.

Monitor Information section

Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

Monitor Method Code - Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Recorded Values section

Monitor Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

Assessment Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

361

13.11.8 Performance Evaluation Program Details

Assessment Details section

Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down

List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the

Site/Parameter screen.

Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.

Monitor Information section

Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

Monitor Method Code - Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Performance Evaluation section

Sampler Type – Click the down arrow and select Independent or Collocated from the drop down list.

Sampler Concentration – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

362

363

13.11.9 Replicate Assessment Details

Assessment Details section

Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down

List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the

Site/Parameter screen.

Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.

Monitor Information section

Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

Monitor Method Code - Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Recorded Values section - Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

364

13.11.10 Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Coarse Details

Assessment Details section

Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down

List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the

Site/Parameter screen.

Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.

PM10 Monitor Information section

PM10 Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

PM10 Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Flow Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

PM2.5 Monitor Information section

PM2.5 Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

PM2.5 Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Assessment Results section

Monitor Flow Rate – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

Assessment Flow Rate – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

365

366

13.11.11 Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Details

Assessment Details section

Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a calendar.

Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was performed.

Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down

List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the

Site/Parameter screen.

Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.

Monitor Information section

Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list.

Monitor Method Code - Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.

Recorded Values section

Monitor Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

Assessment Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.

367

13.12 Monitor Assessment Reports

13.12.1 Annual Performance Evaluation Report

To run the annual performance evaluation report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the

Reports menu, and single click the Annual Performance Evaluation Report. The Annual Performance

Evaluation Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Annual Performance Evaluation Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.

368

13.12.2 Duplicate Assessment Report

To run the duplicate assessment report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu, and single click the Duplicate Assessment Report. The Duplicate Assessment Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Duplicate

Assessment Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.

369

13.12.3 Field Proficiency Test Details Report

To run the field proficiency test report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu, and single click the Field Proficiency Test Details Report. The Field Proficiency Test Details Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the

Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the

Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Field Proficiency Test Details Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.

370

13.12.4 Flow Rate Coarse Details Report

To run the flow rate coarse report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu, and single click the Flow Rate Coarse Details Report. The Flow Rate Coarse Details Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the Generate

Report button on the Ribbon above the Main Navigation menu. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Flow Rate Coarse Details Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each site is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.

371

13.12.5 Flow Rate Verification Details Report

To run the flow rate verification report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu, and single click Flow Rate Verification Details Report. The Flow Rate Verification Details Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the

Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the

Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Flow Rate Verification Details Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.

372

13.12.6 National Performance Audit Report

To run the national performance audit report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu, and single click the National Performance Audit Report. The National Performance Audit Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the National Performance Audit Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.

373

13.12.7 One Point Quality Control Report

To run the one point quality control report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu, and single click the One Point Quality Control Report. The One Point Quality Control Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the

Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the

Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the One Point Quality Control Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.

374

13.12.8 Performance Evaluation Program Details Report

To run the performance evaluation program report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the

Reports menu, and single click the Performance Evaluation Program Details Report. The Performance

Evaluation Program Details Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Performance Evaluation Program Details Monitor Assessment

Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.

375

13.12.9 Replicate Assessment Details Report

To run the replication assessment report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu, and single click the Replicate Assessment Details Report. The Replicate Assessment Details Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the

Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the

Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Replicate Assessment Details Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.

376

13.12.10 Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Coarse Details Report

To run the semi annual flow rate audit coarse report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the

Reports menu, and single click the Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Coarse Details Report and the Semi

Annual Flow Rate Audit Coarse Details Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Coarse Details

Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each site is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.

377

13.12.11 Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Details Report

To run the semi annual flow rate audit report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu, and single click the Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Details Report. The Semi Annual Flow Rate

Audit Details Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Details Assessment Editor in a report format.

Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.

378

13.13 Asset Tracking

The Asset Tracking Tool provides an easy way to create history records for analyzers, samplers, and data loggers; and allows the user to create an asset entity by defining the manufacturer, model number, serial number, etc. The asset can then be associated with a particular logger, directly polled instrument

(which are typically a PM sampler or non-Agilaire data logger), or a measured parameter.

To run the Asset Tracking Tool, single click Asset Tracking under the Data Editors menu. The Asset

Tracking tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add a new Asset Tracker, select the Add Asset button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up a blank Add New Asset screen where you can select Logger, which can be an 8816, 8832, or 8872;

Instrument, which is a directly polled instrument by the software that is licensed by Agilaire,such as a

BAM, TEOM, API, or third party logger; Analyzer, which is associated with the Site/Parameter, usually through a logger; or Unspecified, which is another asset that can only be associated with a site.

Once the asset is created, it defaults to a purchase date of the current day, but that and other properties

(manufacturer, model, serial number, etc) can be edited by selecting the Asset on the left and editing the Asset Details on the right. To change the Associated With, select the asset under the Assets list on the left and select the Assign Asset button on the Ribbon at the top. It will open the Assign Asset screen for the user to select a different association. The current date will be defaulted to represent the new assignment Start date, and the End date of the previous assignment record, but these can be changed, if needed, in the editor after creating the new association.

379

To delete an existing asset, single click the name in the Asset Name column under Rule List that you want to remove. Select the Delete Asset button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the asset is immediately removed from the list.

380

13.14 Asset Reports

13.14.1 Asset Current Status Report

To run the Asset Current Status Report, expand Asset Reports under the Reports menu, and single click

Asset Current Status Report. The Asset Current Status Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. The report will automatically show the current status of all assets entered into the Asset

Tracking editor, as there are no query selections to choose from.

381

13.14.2 Asset History Report

To run the Asset History Report, expand Asset Reports under the Reports menu, and single click Asset

History Report. The Asset History Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. The report will automatically show the history of an asset as it passed through different sites, as there are no query selections to choose from.

13.14.3 Parameter Asset History

To run the Parameter Asset History, expand Asset Reports under the Reports menu, and single click

Parameter Asset History. The Parameter Asset History tab will open on the right side of the screen.

This shows the history of assets associated with a particular site's logger, instrument and parameter records.

382

13.15 ADVP Editor

Automatic Data Validation Processor allows the designation of an unlimited number of logical rules to be applied to the data, and as a result of those rules, data can be flagged, graded, annotated, coded, and/or have an e-mail generated to designated users.

The ADVP’s purpose is to automate the traditionally manual validation process by allowing the user to define simple or complex logical rules, and what to do when the data falls outside of those rule definitions.

Each ADVP rule consists of two main components: a trigger, and a resultant action. If the conditions of the trigger are met for a given data point, the action is taken. If not, nothing happens, and the next rule is evaluated.

A trigger consist of a number of conditions linked by logical combination (AND, OR).

To setup the ADVP editor, single click the ADVP Editor from the Configuration Editors menu. The ADVP

Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To setup a new rule, select the New Rule button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields in each section on the right side of the screen, which are described below. As rules are added they will appear in the Rule Name column on the left of the setup screen.

To delete an existing rule, single click the rule name in the Rule Name column under Rule List that you want to remove. Select the Delete Rule button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the rule is immediately removed from the list.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the ADVP Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick

Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

Rule Information section

Rule Details section

Rule Name –Enter in the name you want to call the rule, then save it to create the base rule so that you can then enter in the logic of the rule and it will be able to save properly because it is link to the base rule that you have already saved. This is a required field.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the rule to run if assigned in the task scheduler to run.

Description – Enter text describing the rule or the purpose of the rule, but is not required.

Average Interval field – Select the type of data from the drop down selection that you want the rule to be ran against. This is a required field.

383

Max Lookback Intervals – Use the radio buttons or click and type in the field the time out per number of intervals to set the number of attempts, and if it fails all attempts it will time out.

After setting up this section select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save and create the base rule.

Actions section

Site – Click the down arrows and select the site name from the drop down list if the condition is to be site specific.

Parameter Template – Click the down arrow and select the parameter template from the drop down list that the condition is to be set for.

Apply Null Code – Click the down arrow and select the null code that properly identifies the data from the drop down list if one is needed for the condition.

Clear Null Code – Click the down arrow and select the null code that you want cleared from the data from the drop down list if one needs to be cleared for the condition.

Add Annotation Test – Enter in any additional information pertaining to the data that needs to be noted. This field is not required.

Assign Value – Enter in a value that you want the data to be overwritten with if the condition set holds true. For example if the condition gives a negative number you can have it replaced with the fixed value of zero.

Assign Data Grade – Use the radio buttons to increase or decrease the value. A data grade is the level of confidence that you have in the data being good.

Apply Flag – Click the down arrow and select the flag that is to be applied to the data in a condition from the drop down list.

Clear Flag – Click the down arrow and select the flag that you want cleared from the data in a condition from the drop down list.

Subject – Enter in a subject for the email if sending an email.

384

Tag Email Urgent – Click the put a check mark in the box to enable the urgent tag to be placed on the email.

Email Message – The message you would like attached to the email.

Conditions Triggering Rule section – The trigger is the” IF” side of the rule.

Condition List section

Condition Number – This shows which condition is to be ran first. They do appear in chronological order. To delete a condition number, highlight the row by clicking the blue box on the left end of the row and press the delete key on the keyboard. It will pop up a message asking if you are sure you want to delete. Click Yes to delete the entry or click No to keep the entry.

Logical Operator to Next – Click the down arrow and select between the options of AND and OR, or it can be left blank to indicate there is only one condition.

Add Condition button – When this button is clicked it automatically inserts a new entry row in the Condition List.

Delete Condition button - When this button is clicked it automatically delete the entry row that is selected in the Condition List.

Condition Details section

Condition Number – Use the radio buttons or click and type in the number of the condition being configured.

385

Comparison Type section –When each subsection changes its options it causes other fields to change, fields to be added, or fields to be taken away depending on the selection made from each of the drop down lists.

Characteristic – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which characteristic to look at the data that best fits the condition. This is a required field. The characteristic options are Annotation Text, Flag, Value, and Variance.

Relationship – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the relationship of the condition being configured. This is a required field. The relationship options will change depending on which characteristic is chosen.

When Annotation Text characteristic or the Flag characteristic is chosen the relationship options are Contains and Doesn’t Contain.

When Variance characteristic is chosen the relationship options are Equal To, Greater

Than, and Less Than.

When Value characteristic is chosen the relationship options are Differs >, Differs <,

Equal To, Greater Than, and Less Than. If Differs > or Differs < is chosen it will bring up a Percent field.

Percent – Use the radio button or click and type in the percent that the Differs great than or less than is to use.

Compare section – The site and parameter lists will remain the same no matter what the characteristic and relationship fields are set to.

Site – Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop down list is if it is being compared to another site, or multiple parameters being compared at a particular site.

Parameter Template – Click the down arrow and select the parameter from the drop down list that is to be compared. This is a required field.

386

To section – Depending on what the characteristic has been set to will depend on the subsection that is brought up in the To section.

When Annotation Text is selected for the Characteristic, and either Contains or Doesn’t

Contain is selected for the Relationship under the Comparison Type section, the To section changes to Annotation Comparison Type.

Annotation Text – Type in the text that is to be attached to the comparison condition.

When Flag is selected for the Characteristic and either Contains or Doesn’t Contain is selected for Relationship under the Comparison Type section, the To section changes to

Flag Comparison Type.

Flag – Click the down arrow and select the flag from the drop down list that applies to the comparison condition.

When Variance is selected for the Characteristic, and either Equal To, Greater Than, or

Less Than is selected for the Relationship under the Comparison Type section, the To section changes to Variance Comparison Type.

Percentage – Use the radio buttons or click and type in the percentage that is to be used in the comparison condition.

387

When Value is selected for the Characteristic, and either Differs >, Differs <, Equal To,

Greater Than or Less Than is selected for the Relationship under the Comparison Type section, the To section changes to Value Comparison Type.

Fixed Value – When this option is selected it turns on the Fixed Value field.

Fixed Value field – Enter in a set value that you want used in the comparison condition.

Historical Average – Does not bring up any additional fields, but instead uses historical values.

Historical Composite – When this option is selected it turns the Historical

Composite Years and +/- Days fields.

Historical Composite Years field – Use the radio buttons or click and type in the number of years of historical data that is to be used in the comparison condition.

+/- Days field – Use the radio buttons or click and type in the number of days that will be plus or minus of the number of years set for the

Historical Composite Years.

Parameter Value – When this option is selected it turns the Parameter

Template and Site fields.

388

Parameter Template – Click the down arrow and select a parameter from the drop down list that is to be used in the comparison condition.

[Site] field – Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop down list if the comparison condition is site specific.

Relation to Next Condition – When setting up a multi-condition rule click the down arrow and select AND or OR from the drop down list, or the field can be left blank if it is a single condition.

13.15.1 Task Scheduler

To add a new ADVP task, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select ADVP Processing Task.

After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the

Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.

When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task

Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the

Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.

Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.

Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you want to handle running the task.

Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The default is the current date and time that you create the task.

Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the task is to run.

389

Task Details Section

General Tab

Basic Task Information section

Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list, which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection section at the top unless given a different name by the user.

Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.

Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.

This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled

Task Selection section at the top.

ADVP Processing Options section

ADVP Rule to Process – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list which ADVP rule to run.

Advanced Tab

Retry Options section

Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.

Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.

Status Logging section

Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.

390

Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.

Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.

Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.

Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.

391

13.16 Work Item Editor

The editor simply allows a user to enter in work items.

To run the Work Item Editor, single click Work Item Editor under the Data Editors menu. The Work Item

Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.

To add new item, select the Add Work Item button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up a blank entry on the right where three of the fields are required to be filled in, in order to save the task.

To delete an existing item, single click the name in the Task Name column that you want to remove.

Select the Delete Work Item button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the task is immediately removed from the list.

Task Definition tab

Task name – Type the name of the task. This field is required.

Task Description – Type in a description of the purpose of the task.

Enabled – Check this box if the work item is to be used.

Notification Enabled – Check this box if the person this item is assigned to is to get a notification. The notification will not be configured in the Notification Subscriptions screen, but rather the check box for

Work Item will be checked under the User’s security setup.

Due Date – When the task is due.

Assigned To – Click the down arrow and select a user from the drop down list. This field is required.

Site – Click the down arrow and select the site name from the drop down list.

Asset – If there is an Asset that is to associated with this item, click the down arrow and select the Asset from the drop down list.

Priority – Click the down arrow and select Low, Medium, or High priority from the drop down list. This field is required.

Category – Click the down arrow and select the category that best fits the task, from the drop down list.

392

Repeat tab can be set to repeat at the desired interval, and the days of the week can also be selected or deselected.

Activity Tab will only show entries once a task has been completed in the Work Items menu.

393

13.17 Work Items

This menu duplicates the information found in the Work Item Editor, and simply allows a user to view work items and mark them as complete.

To run the Work Items, single click Work Items under the Data Editors menu. The Work Items tab will open on the right side of the screen.

This screen loads automatically when opened or refreshed with the paperclip button. It may take the screen a few minutes to load, and will continue to show the progress wheel while in progress.

To complete a task, single click the task in the Task Name list, and select the Complete button on the

Ribbon at the top. It will open another Work Item Completion window that contains the same Work

Item Definition information as the Work Items screen.

In the Entry Details section is where the completion date is entered along with a memo if needed.

394

Chapter 14: SQL Server

Agilaire strongly recommends running a backup of the database frequently. Running a backup daily would be the first choice, but if this is not possible, running a backup weekly would be the second choice.

14.1 Installing SQL Server 2008 R2

To install SQL Server browse the cd and find and double click the Setup.exe file that has the green square with white arrow icon.

Select New installation or add features to an existing installation.

395

It will start to install the Support Rules. When the rules have finished, the number of Failed, Warning, and Skipped should be zero. Click OK.

Enter in the Product Key that came with the software and click Next.

Accept the licensing terms and click Next.

396

Click Install to setup the Support Files.

When the Support Files have finished, the number of Failed, Warning, and Skipped should be zero.

Depending on the security setup on the pc there could be warnings on .Net and the Fire Wall. If any failed, click the Re-run button to see if it can correct the problem. Then Click Next.

Not all SQL features are needed. Select All Features with Defaults and click Next to bring up the features list.

397

The two features that are not needed and can be deselected are Analysis Services and Reporting

Services. All other features are required. Click Next.

When the Installation Rules have finished, the number of Failed, Warning, and Skipped should be zero.

If any failed, click the Re-run button to see if it can correct the problem. Then Click Next.

Select Default Instance and the Instance ID and Instance root directory, and click Next.

398

If the hard drive space is sufficient click Next.

Accept the defaults on the Server Configuration and click Next.

For the Database Engine Configuration select Windows authentication mode and click Next.

399

Click Next on Error Reporting.

When the Installation Configuration Rules have finished, the number of Failed, Warning, and Skipped should be zero. If any failed, click the Re-run button to see if it can correct the problem. Then Click

Next.

Click Next on Ready to Install.

400

When the Installation Progress has finished click Next.

If the process completes successfully click Close.

401

14.2 Backing up the Database in SQL 2008 R2

Before backing up the database the AirVison service under Services must be stopped. Once the service has stopped the backup process can be done.

Open SQL Server Management Studio and connect to the SQL instance installed on that pc. Click the plus sign to expand Databases. Right click on the AVData database and select Tasks then Back Up. This will open a screen titled Back Up Database – AVData. Under the Select a page section on the left side of the screen select General.

Under Source on the right side of the screen the Database field should be defaulted to AVData. The

Recovery model field should be grayed out, but defaulted to SIMPLE.

Note: If it is not set to simple; cancel the backup process and right click on the AVData database | select

Properties | click Options once in the list at the top left | on the right click the down arrow in the

Recovery model field and select Simple |click the OK button at the bottom of the screen to save. Start the backup process over by starting at the beginning of these instructions.

The Backup type field should be defaulted to full. All three of these fields need to remain using their default settings.

Under the Backup set section on the right side of the screen the Name field defaults to AVData-Full

Database Backup. The Description field is not required to be filled in. The Backup set will expire field should be defaulted to After and the field for days defaulted to zero. All three of these fields need to remain using their default settings.

Under the Destination section the Back up to field defaults to Disk and needs to remain using the default setting. Click the Remove button to remove the defaulted path that is listed in the white area. Click the

Add button to bring up a Select Backup Destination window.

402

Destinations on disk field defaults to File name and needs to remain with the File name setting selected.

Click the ellipses button at the right end of the File Name field to bring up a Locate Database Files –

(computer name) window.

This will open a Locate Database Files screen where it defaults to the SQL Backup folder with a default file called AVData.bak. Select AVData.bak in the tree and it will appear in the File name field at the bottom. If the backup files are going to remain in the Backup folder , it is recommended to insert the date of when the backup is ran to the name of the file each time a backup is ran, and this will keep the file from being overwritten any time a backup is ran. For example the file name would look like

AVData03012011.bak. The Selected path field will remain grayed out. The Files of type field defaults to

Backup Files(*.bak,; *.trn) and needs to remain using the default setting. The File name field has to have the extension of .bak on the file name in order for it to be a valid backup file. If the extension is not part of the file name the file will be save without an extension and will be unusable. After entering in the file name click OK and this will bring you back to the Select Backup Destination window where the File name field now shows the path and file name that was just set up. Click Ok to accept this file name.

403

Click the OK button on the Back Up Database screen, on the bottom left the Progress section will show

Executing with the percentage.

Once the backup is finished it will give a message stating “The backup of database “AVData’ completed successfully. Click Ok and the window will close. Close the SQL Server Management Studio.

404

14.3 Restoring the Database in SQL 2008 R2

Before restoring the AVData database from the backup file the AirVision service under Services must be stopped. Once the service has stopped the restoring process can be done.

The AVData database must already exist in order for the backup to have a place to restore to. If the

AVData database does not already exist in SQL it will need to be created. To create a blank database in

SQL Server open SQL Server Management Studio | right click on Databases and select New Database | under the General page selection, on the right side of the screen in the Database name field type in

AVData | Click OK at the bottom |Close the SQL Management Studio when the process has finished.

AVData should now be showing under Databases on the left in the tree, if it is not, right click on

Databases and select Refresh from the pop up menu. Once AVData is showing under Databases right click on the AVData database and select Tasks | Restore |Database. This will open a screen titled

Restore Database – AVData. Under the Select a page section on the left side of the screen select

General.

Under Destination for restore on the right side of the screen the To database field should be defaulted to AVData. The To a point in time field should be grayed out, but defaulted to Most recent possible.

Both of these fields need to remain using their default settings.

Under the Source for restore section on the right side of the screen the From database field should be grayed out, but defaulted to AVData. This field needs to remain using its default setting. The From device field needs to be selected but it will remain grayed out with a blank field. Click the ellipses button at the right end of the field to open the Specify Backup window.

405

The Backup media field should say File. The Backup location should be blank. Click the Add button to bring up the Locate Backup File window.

Open the location C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Backup where the backup file is stored. Select the AVData.bak file so that it is highlighted and the file name appears in the File name field at the bottom of the window and click the OK button to select the file.

This will put the path to the backup file in the Backup location field on the Specify Backup screen. Click the OK button to return back to the Restore Database – AVData screen.

406

The Select the backup sets to restore field now has two backup entries listed. Under the Restore column check the box beside of AVData full Database Backup.

Under the Select a page section on the left side of the screen select Options. Under Restore options on the right side of the screen, check the first option to Overwrite the existing database. Under Restore the database files as will have the AVData and the AVData_log entries listed. Under Recovery state select the first option to RESTORE WITH RECOVERY. Click the OK button to begin the restoring process. On the bottom left the Progress section will show Executing with the percentage.

Once the restore is finished it will give a message stating “The restore of database “AVData’ completed successfully. Click Ok and the window will close. Close the SQL Server Management Studio.

Once the restore has completed and the SQL Server Management Studio has been closed, the AirVision

Server service under Services will need to be started again before logging into AirVision.

407

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement